Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 287

NATIONAL

SENIOR CERTIFICATE

GRADE 12

PHYSICAL SCIENCES: CHEMISTRY (PAPER 2)

2016 - 2023
NATIONAL
SENIOR CERTIFICATE

GRADE 12

PHYSICAL SCIENCES: CHEMISTRY (P2)

NOVEMBER 2016

MARKS: 150

TIME: 3 hours

This question paper consists of 18 pages and 4 data sheets.

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 3 DBE/November 2016
NSC

QUESTION 1: MULTIPLE-CHOICE QUESTIONS

Various options are provided as possible answers to the following questions. Write
down the question number (1.1–1.10), choose the answer and make a cross (X) over
the letter (A–D) of your choice in the ANSWER BOOK.
EXAMPLE:

1.11 A B C D

1.1 In a chemical reaction an oxidising agent will …

A lose protons.

B gain protons.

C lose electrons.

D gain electrons. (2)

1.2 A catalyst is added to a reaction mixture at equilibrium.

Which ONE of the following statements about the effect of the catalyst is
FALSE?

A The rate of the forward reaction increases.

B The rate of the reverse reaction increases.

C The equilibrium position shifts to the right.

D The equilibrium position remains unchanged. (2)

1.3 What product will be formed when an alkene reacts with water vapour (H 2 O)
in the presence of an acid catalyst?

A Ester

B Alkane

C Alcohol

D Aldehyde (2)

1.4 Which ONE of the following represents a SUBSTITUTION REACTION?

A CH 2 = CH 2 + HBr → CH 3 CH 2 Br

B CH 2 = CH 2 + H 2 O → CH 3 CH 2 OH

C CH 3 CH 2 OH → CH 2 = CH 2 + H 2 O

D CH 3 CH 2 OH + HBr → CH 3 CH 2 Br + H 2 O (2)
Copyright reserved Please turn over
Physical Sciences/P2 4 DBE/November 2016
NSC

1.5 Consider the two organic molecules I and II below.

I II
H H O H O H

H C C C H H C C C H

H H H H

Which ONE of the following represents the homologous series to which


compound I and compound II belong?

I II
A Ketones Alcohols
B Aldehydes Ketones
C Aldehydes Alcohols
D Ketones Aldehydes (2)

1.6 Consider the balanced equations for three reactions represented below:

I: N 2 (g) + 3H 2 (g) ⇌ 2NH 3 (g)

II: 4NH 3 (g) + 5O 2 (g) ⇌ 4NO(g) + 6H 2 O(g)

III: 2NO(g) + O 2 (g) ⇌ 2NO 2 (g)

Which of the above reactions form(s) part of the Ostwald process?

A I only

B II only

C III only

D II and III only (2)

1.7 Which ONE of the following pairs is NOT a conjugate acid-base pair?

A H3O+ and OH−

B NH+4 and NH 3

C H2PO−4 and HPO24−

D H 2 CO 3 and HCO3− (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 5 DBE/November 2016
NSC

1.8 The reaction between hydrogen gas and iodine gas reaches equilibrium in a
closed container according to the following balanced equation:

H 2 (g) + I 2 (g) ⇌ 2HI(g)

Which ONE of the graphs below shows the relationship between the amount
of HI(g) at equilibrium and the pressure in the container at constant
temperature?

A B
Amount of HI (mol)

Amount of HI (mol)
Pressure (kPa) Pressure (kPa)

C D
Amount of HI (mol)
Amount of HI (mol)

Pressure (kPa) Pressure (kPa) (2)

1.9 Which ONE of the equations below represents the half-reaction occurring at
the CATHODE of an electrochemical cell that is used to electroplate an
object?

A Ag → Ag+ + e-

B Cr3+ + 3e- → Cr

C Cr3+ + e- → Cr2+

D Cu2+ + e- → Cu+ (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 6 DBE/November 2016
NSC

1.10 Equal amounts of magnesium (Mg) powder react respectively with equal
volumes and equal concentrations of HCℓ(aq) and H 2 SO 4 (aq), as shown
below.

100 cm3 100 cm3


1 mol∙dm-3 HCℓ(aq) 1 mol∙dm-3 H2SO4(aq)
Mg(s) Mg(s)

Test tube X Test tube Y

The magnesium is in EXCESS.

Consider the following statements regarding these two reactions:

I: The initial rate of the reaction in test tube X equals the initial rate of the
reaction in test tube Y.
II: After completion of the reactions, the mass of magnesium that remains
in test tube X will be greater than that in test tube Y.
III: The amount of hydrogen gas formed in X is equal to the amount of
hydrogen gas formed in Y.

Which of the above statements is/are TRUE?

A I only

B II only

C III only

D I and III only (2)


[20]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 7 DBE/November 2016
NSC

QUESTION 2 (Start on a new page.)

The letters A to F in the table below represent six organic compounds.

H H

H C C C H
A B Ethyl ethanoate
H
H C H

C 2,3-dibromo-3-methylpentane D Polyethene

H O H H H H O H

E H C C O C H F H C C C C O

H H H H H H

2.1 Write down the LETTER that represents the following:

2.1.1 A hydrocarbon (1)

2.1.2 A functional isomer of compound F (1)

2.1.3 A compound which belongs to the same homologous series as


compound B (1)

2.1.4 A plastic (1)

2.2 Write down the STRUCTURAL FORMULA of EACH of the following:

2.2.1 Compound C (3)

2.2.2 The acid used to prepare compound B (2)

2.2.3 The monomer used to make compound D (2)

2.3 Compound A reacts with an unknown reactant, X, to form 2-methylpropane.

Write down the:

2.3.1 NAME of reactant X (1)

2.3.2 Type of reaction that takes place (1)


[13]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 8 DBE/November 2016
NSC

QUESTION 3 (Start on a new page.)

The boiling points of three isomers are given in the table below.

BOILING POINT
ISOMERS
(°C)
A 2,2-dimethylpropane 9
B 2-methylbutane 28
C pentane 36

3.1 Define the term structural isomer. (2)

3.2 What type of isomers (POSITIONAL, CHAIN or FUNCTIONAL) are these


three compounds? (1)

3.3 Explain the trend in the boiling points from compound A to compound C. (3)

3.4 Which ONE of the three compounds (A, B or C) has the highest vapour
pressure? Refer to the data in the table to give a reason for the answer. (2)

3.5 Use MOLECULAR FORMULAE and write down a balanced equation for the
complete combustion of compound B. (3)
[11]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 9 DBE/November 2016
NSC

QUESTION 4 (Start on a new page.)

Butane (C 4 H 10 ) is produced in industry by the THERMAL cracking of long-chain


hydrocarbon molecules, as shown in the equation below. X represents an organic
compound that is produced.

C 10 H 22 → X + C 4 H 10

4.1 Write down:

4.1.1 ONE condition required for THERMAL cracking to take place (1)

4.1.2 The molecular formula of compound X (1)

4.1.3 The homologous series to which compound X belongs (1)

4.2 A mixture of the two gases, compound X and butane, is bubbled through
bromine water, Br 2 (aq), in a conical flask, as illustrated below. THE
REACTION IS CARRIED OUT IN A DARKENED ROOM.

Syringe
X and C4H10

Br2(aq)

The colour of the bromine water changes from reddish brown to colourless
when the mixture of the two gases is bubbled through it.

Which ONE of the gases (X or BUTANE) decolorises the bromine water?


Explain the answer. (4)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 10 DBE/November 2016
NSC

4.3 Study the flow diagram below, which represents various organic reactions,
and answer the questions that follow.
OH
I
CH3CH2CHCH3

Butane chlorination
Compound P III
C4H10

II Compound Q
concentrated (major product)
NaOH

Write down the:

4.3.1 IUPAC name of compound P (2)

4.3.2 Type of reaction labelled I (1)

4.3.3 Structural formula of compound Q (2)

4.3.4 The type of addition reaction represented by reaction III (1)


[13]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 11 DBE/November 2016
NSC

QUESTION 5 (Start on a new page.)

Hydrogen peroxide, H 2 O 2 , decomposes to produce water and oxygen according to the


following balanced equation:

2H 2 O 2 (ℓ) → 2H 2 O(ℓ) + O 2 (g)

5.1 The activation energy (E A ) for this reaction is 75 kJ and the heat of reaction
(ΔH) is –196 kJ.

5.1.1 Define the term activation energy. (2)

5.1.2 Redraw the set of axes below in your ANSWER BOOK and then
complete the potential energy diagram for this reaction.

Indicate the value of the potential energy of the following on the


y-axis:

• Activated complex
• Products

(The graph does NOT have to be drawn to scale.)


Potential energy (kJ)

H2O2
0

Course of reaction
(3)

When powdered manganese dioxide is added to the reaction mixture, the rate
of the reaction increases.

5.1.3 On the graph drawn for QUESTION 5.1.2, use broken lines to
show the path of the reaction when the manganese dioxide is
added. (2)

5.1.4 Use the collision theory to explain how manganese dioxide


influences the rate of decomposition of hydrogen peroxide. (3)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 12 DBE/November 2016
NSC

5.2 Graphs A and B below were obtained for the volume of oxygen produced
over time under different conditions.

60 ● ● ● ●

Graph A
● ●
50
Volume of oxygen gas (dm3)

● Graph B
40


30 ●

20

10

0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Time (s)
5.2.1 Calculate the average rate of the reaction (in dm3∙s-1) between
t = 10 s and t = 40 s for graph A. (3)

5.2.2 Use the information in graph A to calculate the mass of hydrogen


peroxide used in the reaction. Assume that all the hydrogen
peroxide decomposed. Use 24 dm3·mol-1 as the molar volume of
oxygen. (4)

5.2.3 How does the mass of hydrogen peroxide used to obtain graph B
compare to that used to obtain graph A? Choose from GREATER
THAN, SMALLER THAN or EQUAL TO. (1)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 13 DBE/November 2016
NSC

5.3 Three energy distribution curves for the oxygen gas produced under different
conditions are shown in the graph below.

The curve with the solid line represents 1 mol of oxygen gas at 90 °C.

Number of molecules P

Kinetic energy

Choose the curve (P or Q) that best represents EACH of the following


situations:

5.3.1 1 mol of oxygen gas produced at 120 °C (1)

5.3.2 2 moles of oxygen gas produced at 90 °C (1)


[20]

QUESTION 6 (Start on a new page.)

Hydrogen gas, H 2 (g), reacts with sulphur powder, S(s), according to the following
balanced equation:
H 2 (g) + S(s) ⇌ H 2 S(g) ∆H < 0

The system reaches equilibrium at 90 °C.

6.1 Define the term chemical equilibrium. (2)

6.2 How will EACH of the following changes affect the number of moles of H 2 S(g)
at equilibrium?

Choose from INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME.

6.2.1 The addition of more sulphur (1)

6.2.2 An increase in temperature


Use Le Chatelier's principle to explain the answer. (4)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 14 DBE/November 2016
NSC

6.3 The sketch graph below was obtained for the equilibrium mixture.

Reaction rate (mol∙s-1)

t1 Time (s)

A catalyst is added to the equilibrium mixture at time t 1 .

Redraw the graph above in your ANSWER BOOK. On the same set of axes,
complete the graph showing the effect of the catalyst on the reaction rates. (2)

Initially 0,16 mol H 2 (g) and excess S(s) are sealed in a 2 dm3 container and the system
is allowed to reach equilibrium at 90 °C.

An exact amount of Pb(NO 3 ) 2 solution is now added to the container so that ALL the
H 2 S(g) present in the container at EQUILIBRIUM is converted to PbS(s) according to
the following balanced equation:

Pb(NO 3 ) 2 (aq) + H 2 S(g) → PbS(s) + 2HNO 3 (aq)

The mass of the PbS precipitate is 2,39 g.

6.4 Calculate the equilibrium constant K c for the reaction H 2 (g) + S(s) ⇌ H 2 S(g)
at 90 °C. (9)
[18]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 15 DBE/November 2016
NSC

QUESTION 7 (Start on a new page.)

7.1 A learner dissolves ammonium chloride (NH 4 Cℓ) crystals in water and
measures the pH of the solution.

7.1.1 Define the term hydrolysis of a salt. (2)

7.1.2 Will the pH of the solution be GREATER THAN, SMALLER THAN


or EQUAL TO 7? Write a relevant equation to support your answer. (3)

7.2 A sulphuric acid solution is prepared by dissolving 7,35 g of H 2 SO 4 (ℓ) in


500 cm3 of water.

7.2.1 Calculate the number of moles of H 2 SO 4 present in this solution. (2)

Sodium hydroxide (NaOH) pellets are added to the 500 cm3 H 2 SO 4 solution.

The balanced equation for the reaction is:

H 2 SO 4 (aq) + 2NaOH(s) → Na 2 SO 4 (aq) + 2H 2 O(ℓ)

After completion of the reaction, the pH of the solution was found to be 1,3.
Assume complete ionisation of H 2 SO 4 .

7.2.2 Calculate the mass of NaOH added to the H 2 SO 4 solution. Assume


that the volume of the solution does not change. (9)
[16]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 16 DBE/November 2016
NSC

QUESTION 8 (Start on a new page.)

8.1 A nickel (Ni) rod is placed in a beaker containing a silver nitrate solution,
AgNO 3 (aq) and a reaction takes place.

Nickel (Ni) rod


AgNO3(aq)

Write down the:

8.1.1 NAME or FORMULA of the electrolyte (1)

8.1.2 Oxidation half-reaction that takes place (2)

8.1.3 Balanced equation for the net (overall) redox reaction that takes
place (3)

8.2 A galvanic cell is now set up using a nickel half-cell and a silver half-cell.

Ag Ni

Ag+(aq) Ni2+(aq)

8.2.1 Which electrode (Ni or Ag) must be connected to the negative


terminal of the voltmeter? Give a reason for the answer. (2)

8.2.2 Write down the cell notation for the galvanic cell above. (3)

8.2.3 Calculate the initial reading on the voltmeter if the cell functions
under standard conditions. (4)

8.2.4 How will the voltmeter reading in QUESTION 8.2.3 be affected if


the concentration of the silver ions is increased? Choose from
INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME. (1)
[16]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 17 DBE/November 2016
NSC

QUESTION 9 (Start on a new page.)

In the electrochemical cell below, carbon electrodes are used during the electrolysis of
a concentrated sodium chloride solution.

Gas X Gas Y

Electrode P Electrode Q
Concentrated NaCℓ(aq)

The balanced equation for the net (overall) cell reaction is:

2H 2 O(ℓ) + 2Cℓ ─(aq) → Cℓ 2 (g) + H 2 (g) + 2OH─(aq)

9.1 Is the reaction EXOTHERMIC or ENDOTHERMIC? (1)

9.2 Is electrode P the ANODE or the CATHODE? Give a reason for the answer. (2)

9.3 Write down the:

9.3.1 NAME or FORMULA of gas X (1)

9.3.2 NAME or FORMULA of gas Y (1)

9.3.3 Reduction half-reaction (2)

9.4 Is the solution in the cell ACIDIC or ALKALINE (BASIC) after completion of
the reaction? Give a reason for the answer. (2)
[9]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 18 DBE/November 2016
NSC

QUESTION 10 (Start on a new page.)

10.1 The flow diagram below shows the processes involved in the industrial
preparation of fertiliser Q.

Process Y
N2(g) + H2(g) Gas P SO2(g) + O2(g)
V2O5

H2SO4(ℓ)

Process X Compound B

H2O(ℓ)

Compound A Compound C

Fertiliser Q

Write down the:

10.1.1 Name of process X (1)

10.1.2 Name of process Y (1)

10.1.3 NAME or FORMULA of gas P (1)

10.1.4 Balanced equation for the formation of compound B (3)

10.1.5 Balanced equation for the formation of fertiliser Q (4)

10.2 The diagram below shows a bag of NPK fertiliser of which the NPK ratio is
unknown. It is found that the mass of nitrogen in the bag is 4,11 kg and the
mass of phosphorus is 0,51 kg.

x – y – z (36)

20 kg
20 kg

Calculate the NPK ratio of the fertiliser. (4)


[14]

TOTAL: 150

Copyright reserved
NATIONAL
SENIOR CERTIFICATE

GRADE 12

PHYSICAL SCIENCES: CHEMISTRY (P2)

NOVEMBER 2017

MARKS: 150

TIME: 3 hours

This question paper consists of 16 pages and 4 data sheets.

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 3 DBE/November 2017
NSC

QUESTION 1: MULTIPLE-CHOICE QUESTIONS

Various options are provided as possible answers to the following questions. Choose
the answer and write only the letter (A–D) next to the question number (1.1–1.10) in
the ANSWER BOOK, for example 1.11 D.

1.1 The IUPAC name of an organic compound with molecular formula C 7 H 14 O 2 :

A Heptanal

B Heptan-1-ol

C Heptan-2-ol

D Heptanoic acid (2)

1.2 Which ONE of the following structures is the functional group of aldehydes?

A O B O

C O H C H

C O D O

C O C C C C
(2)

1.3 Which ONE of the following equations represents a cracking process?

A 5CH 2 = CH 2 →  (CH 2 CH 2 ) 5 

B CH 3 (CH 2 ) 5 CH = CH 2 + H 2 → CH 3 (CH 2 ) 6 CH 3

C CH 3 (CH 2 ) 6 CH 3 → CH 3 (CH 2 ) 4 CH 3 + CH 2 = CH 2

D CH 3 (CH 2 ) 7 OH → CH 3 (CH 2 ) 5 CH = CH 2 + H 2 O (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 4 DBE/November 2017
NSC

1.4 The potential energy diagram for a chemical reaction is shown below.

Potential energy (kJ)


X

Course of reaction

Consider the following statements regarding the graph above:

I: X represents the potential energy of the products formed during the


reverse reaction.
II: The graph could be a representation of the change in potential energy
for the following reaction:

CaCO 3 (s) ⇌ Ca2+(aq) + CO 32− (aq) ∆H > 0

III: The graph could be a representation of the change in potential energy


for the combustion of methane.

Which of the statements above are TRUE?

A I and II only

B II and III only

C I and III only

D I, II and III (2)

1.5 A certain chemical reaction reaches equilibrium at 25 °C. The equilibrium


constant, K c , for the reaction at this temperature is 1,0 x 10-4.

Which ONE of the following statements regarding this reaction at equilibrium


is CORRECT?

A The concentration of the products is equal to that of the reactants.

B The concentration of the products is higher than that of the reactants.

C The concentration of the products is lower than that of the reactants.

D The rate of the forward reaction is lower than the rate of the reverse
reaction. (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 5 DBE/November 2017
NSC

1.6 Consider the following chemical reaction at equilibrium in a closed container:

2HgO(s) ⇌ 2Hg(ℓ) + O 2 (g)

More HgO(s) is now added to the container at constant temperature.

How will the number (in moles) of O 2 (g) and the value of K c be affected at
equilibrium?

NUMBER OF MOLES OF O 2 Kc
A Increases Increases
B Increases Remains the same
C Remains the same Remains the same
D Remains the same Increases
(2)

1.7 Which ONE of the following solutions, each of concentration 0,1 mol∙dm-3, has
the highest pH?

A HNO 3 (aq)

B NH 4 Cℓ(aq)

C Na 2 CO 3 (aq)

D CH 3 COOH(aq) (2)

1.8 The cell notation for a galvanic cell is as follows:

Ni(s) | Ni2+ (1 mol∙dm-3) || Pb2+ (1 mol∙dm-3) | Pb(s)

Which ONE of the following statements is CORRECT for this cell?

A Ni is oxidised.

B Pb(s) is reduced.

C Ni2+(aq) is the oxidising agent.

D Pb2+ is the reducing agent. (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 6 DBE/November 2017
NSC

1.9 Which ONE of the following combinations CORRECTLY shows the products
formed during the electrolysis of a CONCENTRATED sodium chloride
solution?

CATHODE ANODE
A Hydrogen Sodium
B Hydrogen Chlorine
C Chlorine Sodium
D Chlorine Hydrogen
(2)

1.10 Which ONE of the following is NOT part of the eutrophication process?

A Algal bloom

B Bacterial nitrogen fixation

C Depletion of oxygen in water

D Increase in plant nutrients in water (2)


[20]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 7 DBE/November 2017
NSC

QUESTION 2 (Start on a new page.)

2.1 Study the structural formula below.

H H O H H H

H C C O C C C C H

H H H H H

For this compound, write down the:

2.1.1 Homologous series to which it belongs (1)

2.1.2 IUPAC name (2)

2.1.3 IUPAC name of the organic acid used in its preparation (1)

2.1.4 STRUCTURAL FORMULA of its straight chain (unbranched)


functional isomer (2)

2.2 Write down the structural formula of 4-methylpentan-2-one. (3)

2.3 Consider the structural formula below.

H H

H C C H
H H H H H
H C C C C C C C H
H H H
H C H H C H

H H

For this compound, write down the:

2.3.1 General formula of the homologous series to which it belongs (1)

2.3.2 IUPAC name (3)


[13]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 8 DBE/November 2017
NSC

QUESTION 3 (Start on a new page.)

The vapour pressure versus temperature graph below was obtained for four straight
chain (unbranched) alkanes (P, Q, R and S).
FROM P TO S, EACH COMPOUND DIFFERS FROM THE PREVIOUS COMPOUND
BY A –CH 2 GROUP.
The vapour pressures are measured in mmHg. Atmospheric pressure is 760 mmHg.
Graph of vapour pressure versus temperature
900
760
750
P
Vapour pressure (mmHg)

600
Q

450
R

300
P S
R S
Q
150

0 20 40 60 80 100
Temperature (°C)

3.1 Give a reason why alkanes are said to be SATURATED. (1)


3.2 Define vapour pressure. (2)
3.3 Use the information in the graph above to answer the following questions.
3.3.1 What is the effect of an increase in temperature on vapour
pressure? Choose from INCREASES, DECREASES or
NO EFFECT. (1)
3.3.2 Which compound has a boiling point of approximately 68 °C? Give a
reason for the answer. (2)
3.3.3 Which compound has the longest chain length? Fully explain the
answer. (4)
3.4 Compound P has FIVE carbon atoms.
3.4.1 Draw the structural formula of a chain isomer of P. Write down the
IUPAC name of this isomer. (3)
3.4.2 How will the vapour pressure of this isomer compare with that of
compound P? Choose from HIGHER THAN, LOWER THAN or
EQUAL TO. (1)
[14]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 9 DBE/November 2017
NSC

QUESTION 4 (Start on a new page.)

The flow diagram below shows how an alcohol (compound P) can be used to prepare
other organic compounds. The letters A to E represent different organic reactions. X, Y
and Z are organic compounds.

H H H H
Alkene
H C C C C H B Compound Y
(Major product)
H H O H A
H
Compound P E H2, Pt
D

C HBr

Compound X Compound Z
(Organic product)

4.1 Is compound P a PRIMARY, SECONDARY or TERTIARY alcohol? Give a


reason for the answer. (2)

4.2 Write down the type of:

4.2.1 Elimination reaction represented by A (1)

4.2.2 Addition reaction represented by B (1)

4.2.3 Elimination reaction represented by D (1)

4.3 Sodium hydroxide is used as one of the reactants in reaction C.

4.3.1 What type of reaction takes place here? (1)

4.3.2 State the TWO reaction conditions for this reaction. (2)

4.3.3 Write down the IUPAC name of compound X. (2)

4.4 Write down the FORMULA of an inorganic reactant needed for reaction D. (1)

4.5 Using STRUCTURAL FORMULAE, write down a balanced equation for


reaction E. (3)

4.6 Write down the IUPAC name of compound Z. (1)


[15]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 10 DBE/November 2017
NSC

QUESTION 5 (Start on a new page.)

A group of learners uses the reaction between powdered zinc and EXCESS dilute
hydrochloric acid to investigate one of the factors that affects the rate of a chemical
reaction. The balanced equation for the reaction is:

Zn(s) + 2HCℓ(aq) → ZnCℓ 2 (aq) + H 2 (g)

They conduct two experiments. The reaction conditions used are summarised in the
table below.

TEMPERATURE VOLUME OF CONCENTRATION MASS OF


EXPERIMENT
(°C) HCℓ (cm3) OF HCℓ (mol∙dm-3) Zn (g)
I 25 200 0,25 x
II 25 200 0,40 x

The results obtained are shown in the graph (not drawn to scale) below.

Graph of volume of H 2 (g) produced versus time


Volume of H2(g)
produced (cm3)

P
Q

0 30 45 70
Time (s)
5.1 Define reaction rate. (2)

5.2 Write down an investigative question for this investigation. (2)

5.3 Which curve, P or Q, represents the results of experiment I? Explain the


answer. (3)

5.4 The average rate of the production of hydrogen gas, as represented by


graph P, was 15 cm3∙s-1. Calculate the mass of zinc used. Take the molar
gas volume at 25 °C as 24 000 cm3. (5)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 11 DBE/November 2017
NSC

5.5 In a third experiment (experiment III), 200 cm3 of a 0,25 mol∙dm-3 dilute
hydrochloric acid solution at 35 °C reacts with the same amount of zinc
powder as in experiment I and experiment II.

5.5.1 How will the heat of reaction of experiment II compare with that of
experiment III? Choose from MORE THAN, LESS THAN or
EQUAL TO. (1)

5.5.2 How will the activation energy of the reaction in experiment I


compare with that of the reaction in experiment III? Choose from
MORE THAN, LESS THAN or EQUAL TO. (1)

5.6 The rate of the reaction in experiment III is higher than that of experiment I.

Fully explain this statement by referring to the collision theory. (3)


[17]

QUESTION 6 (Start on a new page.)

Carbonyl bromide, COBr 2 , decomposes into carbon monoxide and bromine according
to the following balanced equation:

COBr 2 (g) ⇌ CO(g) + Br 2 (g) ∆H > 0

Initially COBr 2 (g) is sealed in a 2 dm3 container and heated to 73 °C. The reaction is
allowed to reach equilibrium at this temperature. The equilibrium constant for the
reaction at this temperature is 0,19.

6.1 Define chemical equilibrium. (2)

At equilibrium it is found that 1,12 g CO(g) is present in the container.

6.2 Calculate the:

6.2.1 Equilibrium concentration of the COBr 2 (g) (7)

6.2.2 Percentage of COBr 2 (g) that decomposed at 73 °C (4)

6.3 Which ONE of the following CORRECTLY describes the K c value when
equilibrium is reached at a lower temperature?

K c < 0,19 K c > 0,19 K c = 0,19 (1)

6.4 The pressure of the system is now decreased by increasing the volume of the
container at 73 °C and the system is allowed to reach equilibrium.

How will the number of moles of COBr 2 (g) be affected? Choose from
INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME. Explain the answer. (3)
[17]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 12 DBE/November 2017
NSC

QUESTION 7 (Start on a new page.)

7.1 Ammonia ionises in water to form a basic solution according to the following
balanced equation:

NH 3 (g) + H 2 O(ℓ) ⇌ NH+4 (aq) + OH− (aq)

7.1.1 Is ammonia a WEAK or a STRONG base? Give a reason for the


answer. (2)

7.1.2 Write down the conjugate acid of NH 3 (g). (1)

7.1.3 Identify ONE substance in this reaction that can behave as an


ampholyte in some reactions. (1)

7.2 A learner adds distilled water to a soil sample and then filters the mixture.
The pH of the filtered liquid is then measured.

He then gradually adds an ammonia solution, NH 3 (aq), to this liquid and


measures the pH of the solution at regular intervals. The graph below shows
the results obtained.

Graph of pH versus volume of NH 3 (aq)

12

8
pH

0 2 4 6 8 10
3
Volume of NH3(aq) added (cm )

7.2.1 Is the soil sample ACIDIC or BASIC? Refer to the graph above and
give a reason for the answer. (2)

7.2.2 Calculate the concentration of the hydroxide ions ( OH − ) in the


reaction mixture after the addition of 4 cm3 of NH 3 (aq). (4)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 13 DBE/November 2017
NSC

7.3 A laboratory technician wants to determine the concentration of a hydrochloric


acid (HCℓ) sample. He adds 5 cm3 of the HCℓ sample to 495 cm3 of distilled
water to give 500 cm3 of dilute hydrochloric acid, HCℓ(aq).

During a reaction 50 cm3 of this dilute hydrochloric acid solution, HCℓ(aq),


reacts completely with 0,29 g of sodium carbonate, Na 2 CO 3 (s).

5 cm3 50 cm3

HCℓ 495 cm3


sample distilled water 0,29 g
Na2CO3

The balanced equation for the reaction is:

Na 2 CO 3 (s) + 2HCℓ(aq) → 2NaCℓ(aq) + CO 2 (g) + H 2 O(ℓ)

Calculate the concentration of the hydrochloric acid sample. (7)


[17]

QUESTION 8 (Start on a new page.)

8.1 Learners set up a galvanic cell and measure its emf under standard
conditions.

Aℓ Ag

AgNO3(aq)

8.1.1 Write down the name of component Y. (1)

8.1.2 Is Aℓ the ANODE or the CATHODE? (1)

8.1.3 Write down the overall (net) cell reaction that takes place in this cell
when it is working. (3)

8.1.4 Calculate the initial emf of this cell. (4)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 14 DBE/November 2017
NSC

8.2 Consider the half-cells, P, Q and R, represented in the table below.

HALF-CELL
P Q R
Zn | Zn2+(aq) Cℓ 2 | Cℓ ─(aq) Cu | Cu2+(aq)

Different combinations of the half-cells above are compared to determine the


highest emf produced under standard conditions.

8.2.1 Write down the NAME of a suitable electrode for half-cell Q. (1)

8.2.2 State the standard conditions under which the half-cells should
operate to ensure a fair comparison. (2)

8.2.3 Write down the NAME or FORMULA of the strongest reducing agent
in the half-cells above. (1)

8.2.4 Which combination of half-cells will produce the highest emf?


Choose from PR, PQ or QR. (NO calculation is required.) (1)
[14]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 15 DBE/November 2017
NSC

QUESTION 9 (Start on a new page.)

The simplified diagram below represents an electrochemical cell used in the refining of
copper. One of the electrodes consists of impure copper.

Power source

P Q

Concentrated
CuCℓ2(aq)

9.1 What type of power source, AC or DC, is used to drive the reaction in
this cell? (1)

9.2 When an electric current passes through the CuCℓ 2 (aq), the mass of
electrode P increases.

Is electrode P the CATHODE or the ANODE?


Write down the relevant half-reaction to support the answer. (3)

9.3 The impure copper contains zinc impurities which are oxidised to zinc ions.

Refer to the relative strengths of oxidising agents to explain why zinc ions will
not influence the quality of the pure copper produced in this cell. (3)

9.4 Electrodes P and Q are now replaced by carbon electrodes.

9.4.1 What will be observed at electrode Q? (1)

9.4.2 How will the concentration of the electrolyte change as the reaction
proceeds? Choose from INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS
THE SAME. (1)
[9]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 16 DBE/November 2017
NSC

QUESTION 10 (Start on a new page.)

10.1 The equations below represent two industrial processes involved in the
preparation of ammonium nitrate.

Process X Process Y

I: A + 5O2(g) → 4NO + 6H2O(g) IV: N2(g) + 3H2(g) ⇌ 2NH3(g)

II: 2NO(g) + O2(g) → 2B

III: B + H2O(g) → HNO3(g) + NO(g)

Ammonium nitrate

Write down the:

10.1.1 NAME of substance A (1)

10.1.2 FORMULA of substance B (1)

10.1.3 NAME given for reaction I (1)

10.1.4 NAME or FORMULA of the catalyst used in reaction I (1)

10.1.5 Name of process X (1)

10.1.6 Name of process Y (1)

10.1.7 Balanced equation for the preparation of ammonium nitrate from the
products obtained in process X and process Y (3)

10.2 A 15 kg bag of fertiliser contains 5% phosphorus, 10% nitrogen and


15% potassium.

Calculate the:

10.2.1 Mass of phosphorus in the bag (2)

10.2.2 Mass of filler in the bag (3)


[14]

TOTAL: 150

Copyright reserved
NATIONAL
SENIOR CERTIFICATE

GRADE 12

PHYSICAL SCIENCES: CHEMISTRY (P2)

NOVEMBER 2018

MARKS: 150

TIME: 3 hours

This question paper consists of 15 pages and 4 data sheets.

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 3 DBE/November 2018
NSC

QUESTION 1: MULTIPLE-CHOICE QUESTIONS

Various options are provided as possible answers to the following questions. Choose
the answer and write only the letter (A–D) next to the question numbers (1.1 to 1.10) in
the ANSWER BOOK, e.g. 1.11 D.

1.1 Which ONE of the following is the structural formula of the functional group of
the KETONES?

O O
A B
C H C

C C C C D C O H

(2)

1.2 Which ONE of the formulae below represents an ALKANE?

A C2H4

B C5H10

C C14H30

D C8H14 (2)

1.3 Consider the organic compound below.

H H CH3

H C C C CH3

H H CH3

The IUPAC name of this compound is …

A 2,3-dimethyl butane.

B 3,3-dimethyl butane.

C 2,2-dimethyl butane.

D 1,1,1-trimethyl propane. (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 4 DBE/November 2018
NSC

1.4 Activation energy can best be described as the minimum energy required
to …

A cause effective collisions.

B make reactant molecules collide.

C change the orientation of reactant molecules.

D increase the kinetic energy of reactant molecules. (2)

1.5 Which statement is CORRECT for a system in DYNAMIC EQUILIBRIUM?

A All reactants are used up.

B The forward reaction is equal to the reverse reaction.

C All substances in the reaction are of equal concentration.

D The concentration of the reactants and products remain constant. (2)

1.6 Initially, a certain amount of P(g) was placed in an empty container.


The hypothetical reaction reaches equilibrium in a closed container according
to the following balanced equation:

P(g) ⇌ 2Q(g) H < 0

At time t, the temperature is increased.

Which graph below best illustrates the resulting changes in the rates of the
forward and reverse reactions after the temperature is increased?
rate (mol∙s-1)

rate (mol∙s-1)

A B

t time (s) t time (s)


rate (mol∙s-1)
rate (mol∙s-1)

C D

t time (s) t time (s)


(2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 5 DBE/November 2018
NSC

1.7 Reactions I and II below have equilibrium constants (Kc) greater


than 1.

I: H3X + HCO 3 ⇌ H2X− + H2CO3 Kc > 1

II: H3O+ + H2X− ⇌ H2O + H3X Kc > 1

Based on the reactions above, the ACIDS in order of INCREASING


STRENGTH (weakest to strongest) are …

A H3X, H2X−, H3O+

B H2CO3, H3X, H3O+

C H3X, H2CO3, H3O+

D H3X, H3O+, H2CO3 (2)

1.8 Consider the cell notation for a galvanic cell below.

Ni(s) | Ni2+(aq) || H+(aq) | H2(g) | Pt(s)

Which ONE of the following half-reactions takes place at the ANODE of


this cell?

A 2H+(aq) + 2e− → H2(g)

B H2(g) → 2H+(aq) + 2e−

C Ni2+(aq) + 2e− → Ni(s)

D Ni(s) → Ni2+(aq) + 2e− (2)

1.9 Which ONE of the following is applicable to an ELECTROLYTIC CELL?

A Reduction takes place at the anode.

B Oxidation takes place at the cathode.

C It uses alternating current.

D A battery is used for the cell to function. (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 6 DBE/November 2018
NSC

1.10 The flow diagram below shows four stages (A, B, C and D) in the conversion
of sulphur to sulphuric acid.

Stage A Sulphur Stage B Sulphur Stage C


Sulphur Oleum
dioxide trioxide

Stage D

Sulphuric acid

At which stage is a catalyst used?

A A

B B

C C

D D (2)
[20]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 7 DBE/November 2018
NSC

QUESTION 2 (Start on a new page.)

A test tube containing a straight chain organic acid X, ethanol and a catalyst is heated
in a water bath, as illustrated below.

test tube

water bath X + C2H5OH + catalyst

tripod Bunsen burner

Organic compound Y is produced according to the following equation:

X + C2H5OH ⟶ Y + H2O

2.1 Give a reason why the test tube is heated in a water bath instead of directly
over the flame. (1)

2.2 Write down the:

2.2.1 Type of reaction that takes place here (1)

2.2.2 FORMULA of the catalyst needed (1)

2.2.3 Homologous series to which compound Y belongs (1)

The molecular mass of compound Y is 144 g∙mol-1 and its empirical formula is C4H8O.

2.3 Determine the molecular formula of compound Y. (2)

2.4 Write down the IUPAC name of compound Y. (2)

2.5 Write down the structural formula of the organic acid X. (2)
[10]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 8 DBE/November 2018
NSC

QUESTION 3 (Start on a new page.)

The boiling points of different organic compounds are given below.

COMPOUND BOILING POINT (°C)


A HCOOH 101
B CH3COOH 118
C CH3CH2COOH 141
D CH3CH2CH2COOH 164

3.1 Define boiling point. (2)

3.2 Write down the:

3.2.1 Name of the FUNCTIONAL GROUP of these compounds (1)

3.2.2 IUPAC name of compound C (1)

3.2.3 Structural formula of the FUNCTIONAL isomer of compound B (2)

3.3 Which ONE of the compounds, A or B or C, has the highest vapour pressure?
Refer to the data in the table to give a reason for the answer. (2)

3.4 The boiling point of compound B is now compared with of compound X.

COMPOUND BOILING POINT (°C)


B CH3COOH 118
X CH3CH2CH2OH 98

3.4.1 Besides the conditions used to determine boiling points, give a


reason why this is a fair comparison. (1)

3.4.2 Is compound X a PRIMARY, SECONDARY or TERTIARY alcohol?


Give a reason for the answer. (2)

3.4.3 Fully explain the difference between the boiling points by referring
to the types of intermolecular forces present in each of these
compounds. (4)
[15]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 9 DBE/November 2018
NSC

QUESTION 4 (Start on a new page.)

4.1 Three reactions of organic compounds from the same homologous series are
shown below.

I: Butane + Br2 ⟶ 2-bromobutane + P


heat
II: Pentane + excess oxygen ⟶

III: Hexane ⟶ C2H4 + Q

4.1.1 Define a homologous series. (2)

4.1.2 Name the type of reaction represented by I. (1)

4.1.3 Write down the formula of the inorganic compound P. (1)

4.1.4 Give the structural formula of a POSITIONAL isomer of


2-bromobutane. (2)

4.1.5 Using molecular formulae, write down the balanced equation for
reaction II. (3)

Reaction III is an example of a cracking reaction.

4.1.6 Define a cracking reaction. (2)

4.1.7 Give the structural formula of organic compound Q. (2)

4.2 Study the flow diagram below.

Hydrolysis
2-bromobutane Compound R Alkene

4.2.1 Write down the IUPAC name of compound R. (2)

4.2.2 Compound R reacts in the presence of concentrated phosphoric


acid to form an alkene.

Write down the structural formula of the MAJOR PRODUCT in this


reaction. (2)
[17]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 10 DBE/November 2018
NSC

QUESTION 5 (Start on a new page.)

The reaction of zinc and EXCESS dilute hydrochloric acid is used to investigate factors
that affect reaction rate. The balanced equation for the reaction is:
Zn(s) + 2HCℓ(aq) ⟶ ZnCℓ2(aq) + H2(g)
The reaction conditions used and the results obtained for each experiment are
summarised in the table below.
The same mass of zinc is used in all the experiments. The zinc is completely covered
in all reactions. The reaction time is the time it takes the reaction to be completed.
STATE OF
CONCENTRATION VOLUME OF TEMPERATURE REACTION
EXPERIMENT DIVISION
OF HCℓ (mol∙dm-3) HCℓ (cm3) OF HCℓ (°C) TIME (min.)
OF Zn
1 2,0 200 powder 25 7
2 1,5 200 granules 25 14
3 5,0 200 powder 25 5
4 1,5 400 granules 25 x
5 2,0 200 powder 35 4

5.1 Experiment 1 and experiment 5 are compared. Write down the independent
variable. (1)

5.2 Define reaction rate. (2)

5.3 Write down the value of x in experiment 4. (2)

5.4 The Maxwell-Boltzmann energy distribution curves for particles in each of


experiments 1, 3 and 5 are shown below.

B
number of molecules

Ea kinetic energy

Identify the graph (A or B or C) that represents the following:


5.4.1 Experiment 3
Give a reason for the answer. (2)
5.4.2 Experiment 5
Give a reason for the answer. (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 11 DBE/November 2018
NSC

5.5 Experiment 6 is now conducted using a catalyst and the SAME reaction
conditions as for Experiment 1.
5.5.1 What is the function of the catalyst in this experiment? (1)
5.5.2 How will the heat of reaction in experiment 6 compare to that in
experiment 1? Choose from: GREATER THAN, EQUAL TO or
LESS THAN. (1)

5.6 Calculate the average rate of the reaction (in mol·min-1) with respect to zinc
for experiment 2 if 1,5 g of zinc is used. (4)
[15]
QUESTION 6 (Start on a new page.)

Dinitrogen tetraoxide, N2O4(g), decomposes to nitrogen dioxide, NO2(g), in a sealed


syringe of volume 2 dm3.

2 dm3

The mixture reaches equilibrium at 325 °C according to the following balanced


equation:
N2O4(g) ⇌ 2NO2 (g)
colourless brown
When equilibrium is reached, it is observed that the colour of the gas in the syringe is
brown.
6.1 State Le Chatelier's principle. (2)
6.2 The syringe is now dipped into a beaker of ice water. After a while the brown
colour disappears.
Is the forward reaction EXOTHERMIC or ENDOTHERMIC? Explain the
answer using Le Chatelier's principle. (3)
6.3 The volume of the syringe is now decreased while the temperature is kept
constant.
How will EACH of the following be affected? Choose from: INCREASES,
DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME.
6.3.1 The number of moles of N2O4(g) (1)
6.3.2 The value of the equilibrium constant (1)
6.3.3 The rate of the forward and reverse reactions (1)
6.4 Initially X moles of N2O4(g) were placed in the syringe of volume 2 dm3.
When equilibrium was reached, it was found that 20% of the N2O4(g) had
decomposed.
If the equilibrium constant, Kc, for the reaction is 0,16 at 325 °C, calculate the
value of X. (8)
[16]
Copyright reserved Please turn over
Physical Sciences/P2 12 DBE/November 2018
NSC

QUESTION 7 (Start on a new page.)

7.1 Sulphuric acid is a strong acid present in acid rain. It ionises in two steps as
follows:

I: H2SO4(aq) + H2O(ℓ) ⇌ H3O+(aq) + HSO4 (aq)

II: HSO4 (aq) + H2O(ℓ) ⇌ H3O+(aq) + SO24  (aq)

7.1.1 Define an acid in terms of the Lowry-Brønsted theory. (2)

7.1.2 Write down the FORMULA of the conjugate base of H3O+(aq). (1)

7.1.3 Write down the FORMULA of the substance that acts as an


ampholyte in the ionisation of sulphuric acid. (2)

7.2 Acid rain does not cause damage to lakes that have rocks containing
limestone (CaCO3). Hydrolysis of CaCO3 results in the formation of ions,
which neutralise the acid.

7.2.1 Define hydrolysis of a salt. (2)

7.2.2 Explain, with the aid of the relevant HYDROLYSIS reaction, how
limestone can neutralise the acid. (3)

7.3 The water in a certain lake has a pH of 5.

7.3.1 Calculate the concentration of the hydronium ions in the water. (3)

The volume of water in the lake is 4 x 10 9 dm3. Lime, CaO, is added to the
water to neutralise the acid according to the following reaction:

CaO + 2H3O+ ⇌ Ca2+ + 3H2O

7.3.2 If the final amount of hydronium ions is 1,26 x 103 moles, calculate
the mass of lime that was added to the lake. (7)
[20]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 13 DBE/November 2018
NSC

QUESTION 8 (Start on a new page.)

8.1 Corrosion is a redox reaction that takes place in the presence of oxygen and
water. Rusting is the corrosion of iron leading to the formation of iron(III) ions.

8.1.1 Define oxidation in terms of electron transfer. (2)

A cleaned copper rod and a cleaned iron nail are placed in a beaker
containing water at 25°C, as shown below.

Cu

Fe H2O(ℓ)

After a while it was observed that the iron nail was coated with rust. The
copper rod showed no visible signs of corrosion.

8.1.2 Write down the half-reaction for the iron nail. (2)

8.1.3 Does iron act as REDUCING AGENT or OXIDISING AGENT in the


beaker? (1)

8.1.4 Explain the above observation by referring to the Table of Standard


Reduction Potentials. (3)

To prevent rusting of an underground iron pipe, the pipe is connected to a


metal (Q) that corrodes easily.

connecting wire
iron pipe

moist soil
Q

8.1.5 You are given two metals, Zn and Cu, to use as metal Q.
Which metal would more suitable? Give a reason. (2)

8.2 A galvanic cell is constructed using a Fe | Fe3+ half-cell and a Cu | Cu2+


half-cell.

8.2.1 Write down the overall (net) cell reaction that takes place when the
cell is functioning. (3)

8.2.2 Calculate the cell potential of this cell under standard conditions. (4)
[17]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 14 DBE/November 2018
NSC

QUESTION 9 (Start on a new page.)

The electrolytic cell below is set up to obtain pure copper from a piece of impure
copper.
power source

B A

electrolyte

The impure copper contains other metals, such as platinum, iron, cobalt, silver and
nickel.

The cell potential of the power source is adjusted so that only copper is deposited on
electrode B.

9.1 Define an electrolytic cell. (2)

9.2 Write down the FORMULA of a suitable electrolyte for this cell. (1)

9.3 Which electrode (A or B) is the cathode?


Write down the relevant half-reaction taking place at this electrode. (3)

9.4 Sludge forms below one of the electrodes while the cell above is in operation.
Which of the metals, PLATINUM, IRON, COBALT, SILVER or NICKEL, will be
present in the sludge? (2)
[8]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 15 DBE/November 2018
NSC

QUESTION 10 (Start on a new page.)

In the flow diagram below, I and II represent industrial processes used in the fertiliser
industry.

P and Q are chemical reactions that take place to produce ammonium sulphate and
fertiliser Y respectively.

Ammonium sulphate

P
I II
N2(g) + H2(g) NH3(g) HNO3(aq)

Q HNO3(aq)

Fertiliser Y

10.1 Write down the name of the industrial process:

10.1.1 I (1)

10.1.2 II (1)

10.2 Write down the NAME or FORMULA of:

10.2.1 Fertiliser Y (1)

10.2.2 The catalyst used in process I (1)

10.3 In reaction P, NH3(g) reacts with another substance. Write down a balanced
equation for this reaction. (3)

10.4 The following substances are present in a bag of fertiliser:

 20 kg ammonium nitrate (NH4NO3)


 12 kg sodium phosphate (Na3PO4)
 18 kg potassium chloride (KCℓ)

Calculate the NPK ratio of the fertiliser. (5)


[12]

TOTAL: 150

Copyright reserved
NATIONAL
SENIOR CERTIFICATE

GRADE 12

PHYSICAL SCIENCES: CHEMISTRY (P2)

NOVEMBER 2019

MARKS: 150

TIME: 3 hours

This question paper consists of 14 pages and 4 data sheets.

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 3 DBE/November 2019
NSC

QUESTION 1: MULTIPLE-CHOICE QUESTIONS

Four options are provided as possible answers to the following questions. Choose the
answer and write only the letter (A–D) next to the question numbers (1.1 to 1.10) in
the ANSWER BOOK, e.g. 1.11 E.

1.1 Which ONE of the following compounds has the HIGHEST vapour pressure?

A HCOOH

B CH3CHO

C CH3CH2OH

D CH3CH2CH3 (2)

1.2 Which ONE of the formulae below represents the product of a


POLYMERISATION reaction?

H H H
A H C C O H H C C O
B
H H H H

H H
H H O H
C C C
D H C C O C C H

H H n H H H
(2)

1.3 Which ONE of the following combinations are BOTH UNSATURATED


HYDROCARBONS?

A Ethane and ethene

B Ethene and ethyne

C Ethane and ethanol

D Ethanoic acid and ethene (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 4 DBE/November 2019
NSC

1.4 Which ONE of the following sets of values for activation energy (Ea) and heat
of reaction (∆H) is possible for a reaction?

ACTIVATION ENERGY HEAT OF REACTION


(Ea) (∆H)
(kJ∙mol-1) (kJ∙mol-1)
A 100 +100
B 50 +100
C 50 +50
D 100 -50 (2)

1.5 Consider the following balanced equation for a system at equilibrium:

2SO2(g) + O2(g) ⇌ 2SO3(g)

How will the addition of a catalyst to the equilibrium mixture affect the YIELD
and REACTION RATE?

YIELD REACTION RATE


A Increases Increases
B Remains the same Remains the same
C Remains the same Increases
D Decreases Increases (2)

1.6 A hypothetical reaction reaches equilibrium at a certain temperature in a


closed container according to the following balanced equation:

A(g) + 2B(g) ⇌ 3C(s) ∆H < 0


Which ONE of the following changes to the equilibrium conditions will result in
an INCREASE in the equilibrium constant, Kc?

A Increase in temperature

B Decrease in temperature

C Increase in pressure at constant temperature

D Decrease in pressure at constant temperature (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 5 DBE/November 2019
NSC

1.7 A hydrochloric acid solution, HCℓ(aq), and an acetic acid solution,


CH3COOH(aq), of EQUAL CONCENTRATIONS are compared.
How do the H3O+(aq) concentration of HCℓ(aq) and the pH of HCℓ(aq)
compare to that of CH3COOH(aq)?

[H3O+] of HCℓ(aq) pH of HCℓ(aq)


A Higher than Higher than
B Higher than Lower than
C Equal to Equal to
D Higher than Equal to (2)

1.8 Two hypothetical half-reactions and their respective reduction potentials are
shown below:
B+(aq) + e- ⇌ B(s) Eθ = -1,5 V
A2+(aq) + 2e- ⇌ A(s) Eθ = 2,5 V
A galvanic cell is set up using the above substances.
Which ONE of the following statements is CORRECT for this galvanic cell?
A B(s) is the reducing agent.
B A(s) is the oxidising agent.
C The mass of B(s) will increase.
D The mass of A(s) will decrease. (2)

1.9 In an electrolytic cell …


A the anode is the positive electrode.
B oxidation takes place at the cathode.
C electrons flow from the cathode to the anode.
D the mass of the anode increases. (2)

1.10 Which ONE of the following is used as a catalyst in the Ostwald process?
A Iron
B Copper
C Platinum
D Vanadium (V) oxide (2)
[20]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 6 DBE/November 2019
NSC

QUESTION 2 (Start on a new page.)

2.1 The IUPAC name of an organic compound is 4,4-dimethylpent-2-yne.

2.1.1 Write down the GENERAL FORMULA of the homologous series to


which this compound belongs. (1)

2.1.2 Write down the STRUCTURAL formula of this compound. (3)

2.2 The organic compound below has one positional isomer and one functional
isomer.

H O H H H

H C C C C C H

H H H H

2.2.1 Define the term positional isomer. (2)

For this compound, write down the:

2.2.2 IUPAC name of its POSITIONAL isomer (2)

2.2.3 Structural formula of its FUNCTIONAL isomer (2)

2.3 Consider the condensed structural formula of an organic compound below.


CH3CH2C(CH3)CH3

OH

2.3.1 Is this a PRIMARY, SECONDARY or TERTIARY alcohol?


Give a reason for the answer. (2)

2.3.2 Write down the IUPAC name of the above compound. (2)

2.3.3 Write down the IUPAC name of the MAJOR ORGANIC PRODUCT
formed when this compound undergoes an elimination reaction. (2)
[16]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 7 DBE/November 2019
NSC

QUESTION 3 (Start on a new page.)

The boiling points of five organic compounds (P, Q, R, S and T) are studied.

COMPOUND IUPAC NAME


P Pentanal

Q 2,2-dimethylbutane

R 3-methylpentane

S Hexane

T Pentan-1-ol

3.1 Define the term boiling point. (2)

The boiling points of compounds Q, R and S are compared.

3.2 Give a reason why this is a fair comparison. (1)

The boiling points of Q, R and S are given below (NOT necessarily in the correct
order).

55 °C 49,7 °C 68 °C

3.3 Which ONE of the three boiling points is most likely the boiling point of
compound R? Explain the answer. (4)

3.4 A mixture of equal amounts of P and T is placed in a flask and heated to a


temperature below their boiling points. Assume that no reaction or
condensation takes place. The vapour produced is collected in a syringe.
Syringe
vapour

Mixture of P and T

3.4.1 Which compound (P or T) will be present in a greater amount in the


SYRINGE? (2)

3.4.2 Explain the answer to QUESTION 3.4.1 by referring to the TYPES


and STRENGTHS of intermolecular forces. (3)
[12]
Copyright reserved Please turn over
Physical Sciences/P2 8 DBE/November 2019
NSC

QUESTION 4 (Start on a new page.)

The flow diagram below shows how compound A can be used to prepare other organic
compounds. The numbers I, II, III and IV represent different organic reactions.

Compound A

III I H H H
base Concentrated
KOH
Primary alcohol H C C C H

IV CH3COOH II hydration

Organic compound C Compound B


(major product)

Use the information in the flow diagram to answer the following questions.

4.1 Name the homologous series to which compound A belongs. (1)

4.2 Write down the TYPE of reaction represented by:

4.2.1 I (1)

4.2.2 III (1)

4.2.3 IV (1)

4.3 Consider reaction III. Write down the:

4.3.1 TWO reaction conditions for this reaction (2)

4.3.2 IUPAC name of the primary alcohol that is formed (2)

4.4 Draw the STRUCTURAL FORMULA for compound B. (2)

4.5 Consider reaction IV. Write down the:

4.5.1 Structural formula of organic compound C (2)

4.5.2 NAME or FORMULA of the catalyst that is used (1)


[13]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 9 DBE/November 2019
NSC

QUESTION 5 (Start on a new page.)

The calcium carbonate (CaCO3) in antacid tablets reacts with dilute hydrochloric acid
(HCℓ) according to the following balanced equation:
CaCO3(s) + 2HCℓ(aq) → CaCℓ2(aq) + CO2(g) + H2O(ℓ) H < 0

5.1 Is the above reaction EXOTHERMIC or ENDOTHERMIC? Give a reason for


the answer. (2)

An antacid tablet of mass 2 g is placed in HCℓ(aq). After 30 s the mass of the tablet
was found to be 0,25 g.

5.2 Calculate the average rate (in g∙s-1) of the above reaction. (3)

The antacid tablet contains 40% calcium carbonate. Another antacid tablet of mass 2 g
is allowed to react completely with HCℓ(aq).

5.3 Calculate the volume of carbon dioxide, CO2(g) that will be collected at STP.
Assume that all the CO2(g) produced is from the calcium carbonate. (5)

The reaction rate of similar antacid tablets with excess HCℓ(aq) of concentration
0,1 mol∙dm-3 at DIFFERENT TEMPERATURES is measured. The graph below was
obtained.

1
(s-1)
time

Temperature (°C)

Use the information in the graph to answer the following questions.

5.4 Write down ONE controlled variable for this investigation. (1)

5.5 Write down a conclusion that can be made from the graph. (2)

5.6 Use the collision theory to fully explain the answer to QUESTION 5.5 (3)

5.7 Redraw the graph above in the ANSWER BOOK. On the same set of axes,
sketch the curve that will be obtained if HCℓ(aq) of concentration 0,2 mol∙dm-3
is now used. Label this curve Y. (2)
[18]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 10 DBE/November 2019
NSC

QUESTION 6 (Start on a new page.)

Initially 60,8 g pure carbon dioxide, CO2(g), is reacted with carbon, C(s), in a sealed
container of volume 3 dm3. The reaction reaches equilibrium at temperature T
according to the following balanced equation:

C(s) + CO2(g) ⇌ 2CO(g)

6.1 Define the term chemical equilibrium. (2)

6.2 At equilibrium it is found that the concentration of the carbon dioxide is


0,054 mol∙dm-3.

Calculate the:

6.2.1 Equilibrium constant, KC, for this reaction at temperature T (7)

6.2.2 Minimum mass of C(s) that must be present in the container to


obtain this equilibrium (3)

6.3 How will EACH of the following changes affect the AMOUNT of CO(g) at
equilibrium?

Choose from INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME.

6.3.1 More carbon is added to the container (1)

6.3.2 The pressure is increased by reducing the volume of the container


at constant temperature.
Use Le Chatelier's principle to explain the answer. (3)

6.4 The table below shows the percentages of CO2(g) and CO(g) in the container
at different temperatures.

TEMPERATURE (°C) % CO2(g) % CO(g)


827 6,23 93,77
950 1,32 98,68
1 050 0,37 99,63
1 200 0,06 99,94

6.4.1 Is the reaction EXOTHERMIC or ENDOTHERMIC?


Refer to the data in the table and explain the answer. (3)

6.4.2 Use the information in the table to determine temperature T.


Show clearly how you arrived at the answer. (3)
[22]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 11 DBE/November 2019
NSC

QUESTION 7 (Start on a new page.)

A hydrogen bromide solution, HBr(aq), reacts with water according to the following
balanced chemical equation:

HBr(aq) + H2O(ℓ) ⇌ Br  (aq) + H3O+(aq)

The Ka value of HBr(aq) at 25 °C is 1 x 109.

7.1 Is hydrogen bromide a STRONG ACID or a WEAK ACID? Give a reason for
the answer. (2)

7.2 Write down the FORMULAE of the TWO bases in the above reaction. (2)

7.3 HBr(aq) reacts with Zn(OH)2(s) according to the following balanced equation:

Zn(OH)2(s) + 2HBr(aq) → ZnBr2(aq) + 2H2O(ℓ)

An unknown quantity of Zn(OH)2(s) is reacted with 90 cm3 of HBr(aq) in a


flask. (Assume that the volume of the solution does not change during the
reaction.)

The EXCESS HBr(aq) is then neutralised by 16,5 cm3 of NaOH(aq) of


concentration 0,5 mol·dm-3. The balanced equation for the reaction is:

HBr(aq) + NaOH(aq) → NaBr(aq) + H2O(ℓ)

7.3.1 Calculate the pH of the HBr solution remaining in the flask AFTER
the reaction with Zn(OH)2(s). (7)

7.3.2 Calculate the mass of Zn(OH)2(s) INITIALLY present in the flask if


the initial concentration of HBr(aq) was 0,45 mol∙dm-3. (6)
[17]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 12 DBE/November 2019
NSC

QUESTION 8 (Start on a new page.)

A standard electrochemical cell is set up using two standard half-cells, as shown in the
diagram below.

Cℓ2(g) Q
X

Platinum
- X2 (aq)
Cℓ (aq)

8.1 State the energy conversion that takes place in this cell. (1)

8.2 What is the function of component Q? (1)

X is a metal. A voltmeter connected across the cell initially registers 1,49 V.

8.3 Use a calculation to identify metal X. (5)

8.4 Write down the NAME or FORMULA of the reducing agent. (1)

8.5 The reading on the voltmeter becomes ZERO after this cell operates for
several hours.

8.5.1 Give a reason for this reading by referring to the rates of oxidation
and reduction half-reactions taking place in the cell. (1)

A silver nitrate solution, AgNO3(aq), is NOW added to the chlorine half-cell


and a precipitate forms.

8.5.2 How will the reading on the voltmeter be affected?


(Choose from INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS the same) (1)

8.5.3 Use Le Chatelier's principle to explain the answer to


QUESTION 8.5.2. (2)
[12]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 13 DBE/November 2019
NSC

QUESTION 9 (Start on a new page.)

Chlorine is produced industrially by the electrolysis of a concentrated sodium chloride


solution, NaCℓ(aq).

The balanced equation for the net (overall) cell reaction is as follows:

2NaCℓ(aq) + 2H2O(ℓ) → H2(g) + 2NaOH(aq) + Cℓ2(g)

9.1 Define the term electrolysis. (2)

9.2 For the above reaction, write down the:

9.2.1 Half-reaction that takes place at the cathode (2)

9.2.2 NAME or FORMULA of the oxidising agent (1)

9.3 Refer to the Table of Standard Reduction Potentials to explain why sodium
ions are not reduced during this process. (3)
[8]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 14 DBE/November 2019
NSC

QUESTION 10 (Start on a new page.)

The flow diagram below shows the processes involved in the industrial preparation of
an ammonium fertiliser.

Gas X Nitrogen gas

O2(g) NO2(g) H2O(ℓ)


Compound P Gas Y Acid Q

Ammonium
fertiliser

10.1 Write down the NAME or FORMULA of:

10.1.1 Gas X (1)

10.1.2 Gas Y (1)

10.1.3 Acid Q (1)

10.2 Write down the:

10.2.1 TYPE of chemical reaction that converts compound P into gas Y (1)

10.2.2 Balanced equation for the reaction between compound P and


acid Q (3)

10.3 Two separate bags of fertilisers are labelled as follows:

BAG A BAG B
1 : 3 : 4 (21) 1 : 3 : 4 (27)
50 kg 40 kg

10.3.1 What do the numbers (21) and (27) on the labels represent? (1)

10.3.2 Determine, by means of calculations, which bag (A or B) contains


a greater mass of phosphorous. (4)
[12]

TOTAL: 150

Copyright reserved
SENIOR CERTIFICATE/
NATIONAL SENIOR CERTIFICATE

GRADE 12

PHYSICAL SCIENCES: CHEMISTRY (P2)

NOVEMBER 2020

MARKS: 150

TIME: 3 hours

This question paper consists of 15 pages and 4 data sheets.

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 3 DBE/November 2020
SC/NSC

QUESTION 1: MULTIPLE-CHOICE QUESTIONS

Various options are provided as possible answers to the following questions. Choose
the answer and write only the letter (A–D) next to the question numbers (1.1 to 1.10) in
the ANSWER BOOK, e.g. 1.11 E.

1.1 Which ONE of the following is the general formula for the alkanes?

A CnH2n

B CnH2n-2

C CnH2n+2

D CnH2n+2O (2)

1.2 The EMPIRICAL FORMULA of hexanoic acid is …

A C3H6O2

B C6H6O2

C C6H12O2

D C3H6O (2)

1.3 Which ONE of the following is the CORRECT structural formula for
METHYL ETHANOATE?

H O
O H H
H C C O H
A B H C O C C H
H C H
H H
H
H O H O H H

C H C C O C H D H C O C C H

H H H H (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 4 DBE/November 2020
SC/NSC

1.4 Zinc (Zn) granules react as follows with EXCESS hydrochloric acid solution,
HCℓ(aq):

Zn(s) + HCℓ(aq) → ZnCℓ2(aq) + H2(g)

Which ONE of the following combinations of volume and concentration of


HCℓ(aq) will result in the highest INITIAL reaction rate for the same mass of
zinc granules used? (Assume that the zinc granules are completely covered
by the acid in all cases.)

VOLUME HCℓ(aq) CONCENTRATION HCℓ(aq)


(cm3) (mol∙dm-3)
A 50 0,5
B 100 1,0
C 200 0,1
D 200 0,5 (2)

1.5 The role of a catalyst in a chemical reaction is to increase the …

A yield.

B activation energy.

C heat of reaction.

D rate of the reaction. (2)

1.6 Consider the equilibrium represented by the balanced equation below:

2CrO 24 (aq) + 2H+(aq) ⇌ Cr2O 72  (aq) + H2O(ℓ) ΔH < 0

Which ONE of the following changes to the equilibrium will favour the forward
reaction?

TEMPERATURE pH
A Decrease Increase
B Decrease Decrease
C Increase Increase
D Increase Decrease (2)

1.7 The conjugate base of HPO 24  is …

A OH 

B PO 34

C H2PO 4

D H3PO4 (2)
Copyright reserved Please turn over
Physical Sciences/P2 5 DBE/November 2020
SC/NSC

1.8 Which ONE of the following reactions will proceed spontaneously under
standard conditions?

A Ni2+(aq) + H2(g) → Ni(s) + 2H+(aq)

B Br2(ℓ) + 2Cℓ  (aq) → 2 Br  (aq) + Cℓ2(g)

C 2Fe3+(aq) + 2I  (aq) → 2Fe2+(aq) + I2(s)

D 2Cu+(aq) + Pb2+(aq) → 2Cu2+(aq) + Pb(s) (2)

1.9 The simplified diagram below represents an electrochemical cell used for the
PURIFICATION of copper.

P Q

Electrolyte

Which ONE of the graphs below represents the CHANGE IN MASS of


electrodes P and Q during the purification process?

A B
Q P
P
mass

Q
mass

time time
C D
Q P P Q
mass

mass

time time (2)

1.10 Eutrophication in water is caused by …

A algal bloom.

B bacterial nitrogen fixation.

C an increase in plant nutrients.

D a depletion of oxygen concentration. (2)


[20]
Copyright reserved Please turn over
Physical Sciences/P2 6 DBE/November 2020
SC/NSC

QUESTION 2 (Start on a new page.)

The letters A to E in the table below represent five organic compounds.

H CH3 H H H H
A H C C C C C C H B C3H8O

H H CH3 H Br H

H H H O H H H
C H C C C O C C C C H D Pentan-2-one

H H H H H H

E 4-methylpent-2-yne

Use the information in the table to answer the questions that follow.

2.1 For compound D, write down the:

2.1.1 Homologous series to which it belongs (1)

2.1.2 IUPAC name of a FUNCTIONAL ISOMER (2)

2.2 Write down the:

2.2.1 IUPAC name of compound A (3)

2.2.2 STRUCTURAL FORMULA of compound E (2)

2.3 Compound B is a primary alcohol.

2.3.1 Write down the meaning of the term primary alcohol. (2)

Compound B reacts with another organic compound X to form compound C.

Write down the:

2.3.2 Type of reaction that takes place (1)

2.3.3 IUPAC name of compound X (1)


[12]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 7 DBE/November 2020
SC/NSC

QUESTION 3 (Start on a new page.)

The relationship between boiling point and the number of carbon atoms in straight
chain molecules of aldehydes, alkanes and primary alcohols is investigated. Curves A,
B and C are obtained.

573
A
Boiling point (K)

473
B

373
C
273

173
3 4 5 6 7 8
Number of carbons

3.1 Define the term boiling point. (2)

3.2 Write down the STRUCTURAL FORMULA of the functional group of the
aldehydes. (1)

3.3 The graph shows that the boiling points increase as the number of carbon
atoms increases. Fully explain this trend. (3)

3.4 Identify the curve (A, B or C) that represents the following:

3.4.1 Compounds with London forces only (1)

3.4.2 The aldehydes


Explain the answer. (4)

3.5 Use the information in the graph and write down the IUPAC name of the
compound with a boiling point of 373 K. (2)

3.6 Write down the IUPAC name of the compound containing five carbon atoms,
which has the lowest vapour pressure at a given temperature. (2)
[15]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 8 DBE/November 2020
SC/NSC

QUESTION 4 (Start on a new page.)

The flow diagram below shows how various organic compounds can be prepared using
compound P as starting reagent.

Compound R

Bromination
Reaction I
Compound P Compound Q + C5H12

Hydrohalogenation

CH3CHCℓCH3

Hydrolysis

Compound S

4.1 Write down the meaning of the term hydrohalogenation. (2)

4.2 Write down the STRUCTURAL FORMULA of compound Q. (2)

4.3 Reaction I is an elimination reaction.

Write down the:

4.3.1 TYPE of elimination reaction (1)

4.3.2 MOLECULAR FORMULA of compound P (1)

4.4 Write down the IUPAC name of compound R. (2)

4.5 For the HYDROLYSIS REACTION, write down the:

4.5.1 Balanced equation using structural formulae (5)

4.5.2 TWO reaction conditions (2)


[15]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 9 DBE/November 2020
SC/NSC

QUESTION 5 (Start on a new page.)

The reaction of calcium carbonate (CaCO3) and EXCESS dilute hydrochloric acid
(HCℓ) is used to investigate one of the factors that affects reaction rate. The balanced
equation for the reaction is:

CaCO3(s) + 2HCℓ(aq) → CaCℓ2(aq) + H2O(ℓ) + CO2(g)

The same mass of CaCO3 is used in all the experiments and the temperature of the
hydrochloric acid in all experiments is 40 °C.

The reaction conditions for each experiment are summarised in the table below.

VOLUME OF CONCENTRATION STATE OF


EXPERIMENT HCℓ(aq) OF HCℓ(aq) DIVISION OF
(cm3) (mol∙dm-3) CaCO3
A 500 0,1 granules
B 500 0,1 lumps
C 500 0,1 powder

5.1 For this investigation write down the:

5.1.1 Dependent variable (1)

5.1.2 Independent variable (1)

The carbon dioxide gas, CO2(g), produced during EXPERIMENT A, is collected in a


gas syringe. The volume of gas collected is measured every 20 s and the results
obtained are shown in the graph below.

500
460
Volume of CO2 gas (cm3)

300

0
0 20 40 60 120
Time (s)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 10 DBE/November 2020
SC/NSC

5.2 What can be deduced from the graph regarding the RATE OF THE
REACTION during the time interval:

5.2.1 20 s to 40 s (1)

5.2.2 60 s to 120 s (1)

5.3 Calculate the average rate (in cm3∙s-1) at which CO2(g) is produced in the
experiment. (3)

5.4 How will the volume of CO2(g) produced in experiment B compare to that
produced in experiment A? Choose from GREATER THAN, SMALLER THAN
or EQUAL TO. (1)

5.5 A graph is now drawn for experiment C on the same set of axes. How will the
gradient of this graph compare to the gradient of the graph for experiment A?
Choose from GREATER THAN, SMALLER THAN or EQUAL TO.

Use the collision theory to fully explain the answer. (4)

5.6 Assume that the molar gas volume at 40 °C is 25,7 dm3∙mol-1. Calculate the
mass of CaCO3(s) used in experiment A. (4)
[16]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 11 DBE/November 2020
SC/NSC

QUESTION 6 (Start on a new page.)

The dissociation of iodine molecules to iodine atoms (I) is a reversible reaction taking
place in a sealed container at 727 °C. The balanced equation for the reaction is:

I2(g) ⇌ 2I(g)

Kc for the reaction at 727 °C is 3,76 x 10-3.

6.1 Write down the meaning of the term reversible reaction. (1)

6.2 At equilibrium the pressure of the system is increased by decreasing the


volume of the container at constant temperature.

How will EACH of the following be affected? Choose from INCREASES,


DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME.

6.2.1 The value of the equilibrium constant (1)

6.2.2 The number of I2 molecules (1)

6.3 Explain the answer to QUESTION 6.2.2 by referring to Le Chatelier's


principle. (2)

6.4 At 227 °C, the KC value for the reaction above is 5,6 x 10-12.

Is the forward reaction ENDOTHERMIC or EXOTHERMIC?


Fully explain the answer. (4)

6.5 A certain mass of iodine molecules (I2) is sealed in a 12,3 dm3 flask at a
temperature of 727 °C (Kc = 3,76 x 10-3).

When equilibrium is reached, the concentration of the iodine atoms is found to


be 4,79 x 10-3 mol∙dm-3. Calculate the INITIAL MASS of the iodine molecules
in the flask. (9)
[18]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 12 DBE/November 2020
SC/NSC

QUESTION 7 (Start on a new page.)

7.1 Ethanoic acid (CH3COOH) is an ingredient of household vinegar.

7.1.1 Is ethanoic acid a WEAK acid or a STRONG acid? Give a reason for
the answer. (2)

7.1.2 An ethanoic acid solution has a pH of 3,85 at 25 °C. Calculate the


concentration of the hydronium ions, H3O+(aq), in the solution. (3)

Sodium ethanoate, CH3COONa(aq), forms when ethanoic acid reacts with


sodium hydroxide.

7.1.3 Will the pH of a sodium ethanoate solution be GREATER THAN 7,


LESS THAN 7 or EQUAL TO 7? (1)

7.1.4 Explain the answer to QUESTION 7.1.3 with the aid of a balanced
chemical equation. (3)

7.2 Household vinegar contains 4,52% ethanoic acid, CH3COOH by volume.

A 1,2 g impure sample of calcium carbonate (CaCO3) is added to 25 cm3


household vinegar.

On completion of the reaction, the EXCESS ethanoic acid in the household


vinegar is neutralised by 14,5 cm3 of a sodium hydroxide solution of
concentration 1 mol∙dm-3. The balanced equation for the reaction is:

CH3COOH(aq) + NaOH(aq) → CH3COONa(aq) + H2O(ℓ)

7.2.1 Calculate the number of moles of the unreacted ethanoic acid. (3)

7.2.2 Calcium carbonate reacts with ethanoic acid according to the


following balanced equation:

CaCO3(s) + 2CH3COOH(aq) → (CH3COO)2Ca(aq) + H2O + CO2(g)

Calculate the percentage calcium carbonate in the impure sample if


1 cm3 of household vinegar has a mass of 1 g. (8)
[20]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 13 DBE/November 2020
SC/NSC

QUESTION 8 (Start on a new page.)

The electrochemical cell illustrated below is set up under standard conditions.

Hydrogen gas X

Mg

Platinum
H+(aq) Mg2+(aq)

8.1 Component X completes the circuit in the cell. State ONE other function of
component X. (1)

8.2 Define the term anode. (2)

8.3 Identify the anode in the cell above. (1)

8.4 Write down the:

8.4.1 Reduction half-reaction that takes place in this cell (2)

8.4.2 NAME or FORMULA of the reducing agent in this cell (1)

8.5 Calculate the initial voltmeter reading of this cell under standard conditions. (4)

8.6 The Mg|Mg2+ half-cell is now replaced by a Cu|Cu2+ half-cell. It is found that
the direction of electron flow changes.

Fully explain why there is a change in direction of electron flow by referring to


the relative strengths of the reducing agents involved. (3)
[14]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 14 DBE/November 2020
SC/NSC

QUESTION 9 (Start on a new page.)

The simplified diagram below represents an electrolytic cell used to electroplate a


copper (Cu) coin with silver (Ag).

Copper coin Silver electrode

Electrolyte

9.1 Define the term electrolysis. (2)

9.2 Which component in the diagram indicates that this is an electrolytic cell? (1)

9.3 Write down the NAME or FORMULA of the electrolyte. (1)

9.4 How will the concentration of the electrolyte change during electroplating?
Choose from INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME.

Give a reason for the answer. (2)

9.5 Write down the balanced equation of the half-reaction that takes place at the
silver electrode. (2)
[8]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 15 DBE/November 2020
SC/NSC

QUESTION 10 (Start on a new page.)

10.1 The flow diagram below shows how fertiliser B is produced in industry.

Raw material S Raw material T

Nitrogen Hydrogen

Process 1

Process 2 Nitric acid


Compound A

Fertiliser B

Write down the:

10.1.1 NAME of S (1)

10.1.2 NAME of T (1)

10.1.3 NAME or FORMULA of the catalyst used in process 1 (1)

10.1.4 NAME or FORMULA of compound A (1)

10.1.5 NAME of process 2 (1)

10.1.6 Balanced equation for the formation of fertiliser B (3)

10.2 A 20 kg bag of fertiliser is labelled as follows: 2 : 4 : 3 (X).

10.2.1 What does the ratio on the label represent? (1)

10.2.2 The bag contains 2,315 kg phosphorous.

Calculate the value of X. (3)


[12]

TOTAL: 150

Copyright reserved
NATIONAL
SENIOR CERTIFICATE

GRADE 12

PHYSICAL SCIENCES: CHEMISTRY (P2)

NOVEMBER 2021

MARKS: 150

TIME: 3 hours

This question paper consists of 15 pages and 4 data sheets.

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 3 DBE/November 2021
NSC

QUESTION 1: MULTIPLE-CHOICE QUESTIONS

Various options are provided as possible answers to the following questions. Choose
the answer and write only the letter (A–D) next to the question numbers (1.1 to 1.10) in
the ANSWER BOOK, e.g. 1.11 E.

1.1 Which formula shows the way in which atoms are bonded in a molecule but
does not show all the bond lines?

A Empirical

B Molecular

C Structural

D Condensed structural (2)

1.2 Which ONE of the following compounds has hydrogen bonds between its
molecules?

A CH3(CH2)2CH3

B CH3COCH2CH3

C CH3COOCH2CH3

D CH3CH(OH)CH2CH3 (2)

1.3 Consider the compound below.


CH3

CH3 CH C CH2

O CH3
Which ONE of the following is the IUPAC name of this compound?

A 2-methylpentan-3-one

B 4-methylpentan-3-one

C 2,3-dimethylbutan-2-one

D 2,2,4-trimethylpropan-2-one (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 4 DBE/November 2021
NSC

1.4 A 2 g piece of magnesium reacts with EXCESS hydrochloric acid according to


the following balanced equation:

Mg(s) + 2HCℓ(aq) → MgCℓ2(aq) + H2(g)

Which ONE of the following changes will INCREASE the YIELD of H2(g)?

A Crush the piece of magnesium.

B Use a 3 g piece of magnesium.

C Use a greater volume of the acid.

D Use a higher concentration of the acid. (2)

1.5 The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution curve P represents the number of


molecules against kinetic energy for a certain reaction.

Curve Q is obtained after a change was made to one reaction condition.

Q
Number of molecules

EA
P

Kinetic energy

Which ONE of the following changes resulted in curve Q?

A Addition of a catalyst

B Increase in temperature

C Increase in activation energy

D Increase in the concentration of the reactants (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 5 DBE/November 2021
NSC

1.6 The expression for the equilibrium constant (Kc) of a hypothetical reaction is
given as follows:
[ X] 3
Kc =
[ Y ] 2 [ Z]

Which ONE of the following equations for a reaction at equilibrium matches


the above expression?

A Z(g) + 2Y(g) ⇌ 3X(s)

B Z(aq) + 2Y(aq) ⇌ 3X(ℓ)

C Z(g) + Y2(g) ⇌ 3X(aq) + Q(s)

D Z(aq) + 2Y(aq) ⇌ 3X(aq) + Q(s) (2)

1.7 Two dilute acids of equal concentrations are added to separate test tubes as
shown below.

100 cm3 HCℓ(aq) 100 cm3 CH3COOH(aq)

Consider the following statements regarding these acids:

I: The pH of each is less than 7.


II: Both will react at the same rate with 5 g of magnesium powder.
III: Both will neutralise the same number of moles of NaOH(aq).

Which of the statements above is/are TRUE?

A I only

B I, II and III

C I and III only

D II and III only (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 6 DBE/November 2021
NSC

1.8 Which ONE of the following is the conjugate base of H2PO 4 ?

A PO 34

B HPO24

C H3PO4

D H4PO 4 (2)

1.9 The diagram below represents a voltaic cell.

Zn(s) KCℓ(aq) Cu(s)

X Y
ZnSO4(aq) CuSO4(aq)

Which ONE of the following correctly describes the movement of ions in the
cell?

TYPE OF IONS DIRECTION OF MOVEMENT


A Cℓ─(aq) Y to X
B SO 24 (aq) X to Y
C Cu2+(aq) Y to X
D K+(aq) Y to X (2)

1.10 The diagram below represents a cell that is used for the refining of copper.

power
supply

X impure copper

CuSO4(aq)

Which ONE of the following statements is TRUE?

A X is made of platinum.

B The mass of X increases.

C X is the electrode where oxidation takes place.

D X is connected to the positive terminal of the power supply. (2)


[20]
Copyright reserved Please turn over
Physical Sciences/P2 7 DBE/November 2021
NSC

QUESTION 2 (Start on a new page.)

The letters A to H in the table below represent eight organic compounds.

H O H H

A H C C O H B H C C C CH3

H H CH3

C CH3CH2CH2COCH3 D C2H6O

E C2H4 F 3-methylbutan-2-one

H Cℓ H H H H
G H C C C C C C H H 3-methylbutanal

H H CH3 H Cℓ H

2.1 Define the term unsaturated compound. (2)

2.2 Write down the:


2.2.1 Letter that represents an UNSATURATED compound (1)
2.2.2 NAME of the functional group of compound C (1)
2.2.3 Letter that represents a CHAIN ISOMER of compound C (2)
2.2.4 IUPAC name of compound G (3)
2.2.5 General formula of the homologous series to which compound E
belongs (1)

2.3 Define the term functional isomers. (2)

2.4 For compound A, write down the:


2.4.1 Homologous series to which it belongs (1)
2.4.2 STRUCTURAL FORMULA of its FUNCTIONAL isomer (2)

2.5 Compound D undergoes a dehydration reaction. Write down the:


2.5.1 IUPAC name of compound D (1)
2.5.2 Letter that represents a product of this reaction (1)

2.5.3 NAME or FORMULA of the inorganic reactant that is used in this


reaction (1)
[18]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 8 DBE/November 2021
NSC

QUESTION 3 (Start on a new page.)

The melting points and boiling points of four straight-chain ALKANES are shown in the
table below.

MELTING POINT BOILING POINT


COMPOUND
(°C) (°C)
Pentane -130 36,1
Hexane -94 69
Heptane -90,6 98,4
Octane -57 125

3.1 Define the term melting point. (2)

3.2 Write down the general conclusion that can be made about the melting points
of straight-chain alkanes. (2)

3.3 Name the type of Van der Waals forces between molecules of octane. (1)

3.4 Write down the predominant phase of the following alkanes at -100 °C.

Choose from GAS, LIQUID or SOLID.

3.4.1 Pentane (1)

3.4.2 Octane (1)

3.5 Hexane is now compared to 2,2-dimethylbutane.

3.5.1 Is the molecular mass of hexane GREATER THAN, LESS THAN or


EQUAL to that of 2,2-dimethylbutane?

Give a reason for the answer. (2)

3.5.2 Is the boiling point of 2,2-dimethylbutane HIGHER THAN,


LOWER THAN or EQUAL TO that of hexane? (1)

3.5.3 Fully explain the answer to QUESTION 3.5.2. (3)


[13]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 9 DBE/November 2021
NSC

QUESTION 4 (Start on a new page.)

4.1 Compound P is used as a starting reactant in each of two reactions as shown


in the flow diagram below.

Compound P I
C5H11Br 2-methylbutan-1-ol
Dilute NaOH(aq)

II concentrated
NaOH

III Compound R
Compound Q
HBr (major product)

I, II and III represent organic reactions.

4.1.1 Name the type of reaction represented by I. (1)

4.1.2 Is 2-methylbutan-1-ol a PRIMARY, SECONDARY or TERTIARY


alcohol?

Give a reason for the answer. (2)

4.1.3 Write down the STRUCTURAL FORMULA of compound P. (3)

4.1.4 Name the type of reaction represented by II. (1)

4.1.5 To which homologous series does compound Q belong? (1)

4.1.6 Name the type of reaction represented by III.

Choose from ADDITION, ELIMINATION or SUBSTITUTION. (1)

4.1.7 Write down the IUPAC name of compound R. (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 10 DBE/November 2021
NSC

4.2 1,2-dibromopropane can be prepared from but-2-ene by a three-step process


as shown in the flow diagram below.

step 1 step 2
But-2-ene Compound A Compound B

step 3

1,2-dibromopropane

4.2.1 Using CONDENSED STRUCTURAL FORMULAE, write down a


balanced equation for step 1. Indicate the reaction conditions on
the arrow. (4)

4.2.2 Write down the type of reaction in step 2. (1)

4.2.3 Write down the IUPAC name of compound B. (2)

4.2.4 Using CONDENSED STRUCTURAL FORMULAE, write down a


balanced equation for step 3. (3)
[21]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 11 DBE/November 2021
NSC

QUESTION 5 (Start on a new page.)

The reaction of 15 g of an IMPURE sample of calcium carbonate, CaCO3, with


EXCESS hydrochloric acid, HCℓ, of concentration 1,0 mol∙dm-3, is used to investigate
the rate of a reaction. The balanced equation for the reaction is:

CaCO3(s) + 2HCℓ(aq) → CaCℓ2(aq) + H2O(ℓ) + CO2(g)

The volume of CO2(g) produced is measured at regular intervals. A sketch graph


representing the total volume of carbon dioxide gas produced as a function of time is
shown below.
Volume CO2(g) (cm3)

0 t1 t2 t3 Time (s)

5.1 Define the term reaction rate. (2)

5.2 Give a reason why the gradient of the graph decreases between t 2 and t3. (1)

5.3 Changes in the graph between t1 and t2 are due to temperature changes
within the reaction mixture.

5.3.1 Is the reaction EXOTHERMIC or ENDOTHERMIC? (1)

5.3.2 Explain the answer by referring to the graph. (3)

5.4 The percentage purity of the sample is 82,5%.

Calculate the value of X on the graph assuming that the gas is collected at
25 °C. Take the molar gas volume at 25 °C as 24 000 cm3. (5)

5.5 How will the reaction rate change if 15 g of a PURE sample of CaCO 3 reacts
with the same HCℓ solution?

Choose from INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME. (1)

5.6 Use the collision theory to explain the answer to QUESTION 5.5. (2)
[15]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 12 DBE/November 2021
NSC

QUESTION 6 (Start on a new page.)

Consider the balanced equation below for a hypothetical reaction that takes place in a
sealed 2 dm3 container at 300 K.

2P(g) + Q2(g) ⇌ 2PQ(g)

6.1 Define the term chemical equilibrium. (2)

6.2 The amount of each substance present in the equilibrium mixture at 300 K is
shown in the table below.

AMOUNT (mol) AT
EQUILIBRIUM
P 0,8
Q2 0,8
PQ 3,2

The temperature of the container is now increased to 350 K.

When a NEW equilibrium is established, it is found that 1,2 mol P(g) is


present in the container.

6.2.1 Is the heat of the reaction (∆H) POSITIVE or NEGATIVE? (1)

6.2.2 Use Le Chatelier's principle to explain the answer to


QUESTION 6.2.1. (3)

6.2.3 Calculate the equilibrium constant at 350 K. (8)

6.2.4 How will the equilibrium constant calculated in QUESTION 6.2.3 be


affected when the volume of the container is decreased at constant
temperature?

Choose from INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE


SAME.

Give a reason for the answer. (2)

6.3 More Q2(g) is now added to the reaction mixture at constant temperature.

How will EACH of the following be affected?

Choose from INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME.

6.3.1 The yield of PQ(g) (1)

6.3.2 Number of moles of P(g) (1)


[18]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 13 DBE/November 2021
NSC

QUESTION 7 (Start on a new page.)

7.1 Sulphuric acid, H2SO4, ionises into two steps as follows:

I H2SO4(aq) + H2O(ℓ) → HSO 4 (aq) + H3O+(aq) Ka = 1 x 103

II HSO 4 (aq) + H2O(ℓ) → SO 24  (aq) + H3O+(aq) Ka = 1 x 10-2

7.1.1 Define an acid in terms of the Lowry-Brønsted theory. (2)

7.1.2 Write down the NAME or FORMULA of the substance that acts as
an ampholyte in the above equations.

Give a reason for the answer. (2)

7.1.3 The conductivity of solutions of HSO 4 (aq) and H2SO4(aq) are


compared. Which solution will have a LOWER conductivity?

Explain the answer. (3)

7.2 The pH of a hydrochloric acid solution, HCℓ(aq), is 1,02 at 25 °C.

7.2.1 Calculate the concentration of the HCℓ(aq). (3)

This HCℓ solution reacts with sodium carbonate, Na2CO3, according to the
following balanced equation:

2HCℓ(aq) + Na2CO3(aq) → 2NaCℓ(aq) + CO2(g) + H2O(ℓ)

50 cm3 of the HCℓ solution is added to 25 cm3 of a 0,075 mol∙dm-3 Na2CO3


solution.

7.2.2 Calculate the concentration of the EXCESS HCℓ in the new


solution. (8)
[18]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 14 DBE/November 2021
NSC

QUESTION 8 (Start on a new page.)

The table below shows two half-cells, A and B, used to assemble an electrochemical
cell under STANDARD CONDITIONS.

Half-cell A Cu2+ (aq) | Cu(s)


Half-cell B Ag+ (aq) | Ag(s)

8.1 State the energy conversion that takes place in this cell. (1)

8.2 Calculate the mass of silver nitrate, AgNO3, used to prepare 150 cm3 of the
electrolyte solution in half-cell B. (4)

8.3 Define the term reducing agent. (2)

8.4 Write down the:

8.4.1 NAME or FORMULA of the reducing agent (1)

8.4.2 Balanced equation for the reaction that takes place (3)

8.5 Calculate the initial emf of this cell. (4)

8.6 How will the emf of the cell be affected if the concentration of the copper ions
in half-cell A increases?

Choose from INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME. (1)


[16]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 15 DBE/November 2021
NSC

QUESTION 9 (Start on a new page.)

The diagram below shows a simplified electrolytic cell used to electroplate a ring.

power
source

pure chromium metal

ring

concentrated Cr3+(aq)

9.1 Define the term electrolyte. (2)

9.2 Is the pure chromium metal the ANODE or the CATHODE of the cell? Give a
reason for the answer. (2)

9.3 Write down the half-reaction that takes place at the ring. (2)

9.4 Calculate the total charge transferred when the mass of the pure chromium
changes by 2 g. (5)
[11]

TOTAL: 150

Copyright reserved
NATIONAL
SENIOR CERTIFICATE

GRADE 12

PHYSICAL SCIENCES: CHEMISTRY (P2)

NOVEMBER 2022

MARKS: 150

TIME: 3 hours

This question paper consists of 14 pages and 4 data sheets.

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 2 DBE/November 2022
NSC

INSTRUCTIONS AND INFORMATION

1. Write your centre number and examination number in the appropriate spaces
on the ANSWER BOOK.

2. This question paper consists of NINE questions. Answer ALL the questions in
the ANSWER BOOK.

3. Start EACH question on a NEW page in the ANSWER BOOK.

4. Number the answers correctly according to the numbering system used in this
question paper.

5. Leave ONE line between two subquestions, e.g. between QUESTION 2.1 and
QUESTION 2.2.

6. You may use a non-programmable calculator.

7. You may use appropriate mathematical instruments.

8. Show ALL formulae and substitutions in ALL calculations.

9. Round off your FINAL numerical answers to a minimum of TWO decimal


places.

10. Give brief motivations, discussions, etc. where required.

11. You are advised to use the attached DATA SHEETS.

12. Write neatly and legibly.

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 3 DBE/November 2022
NSC

QUESTION 1: MULTIPLE-CHOICE QUESTIONS

Various options are provided as possible answers to the following questions.


Each question has only ONE correct answer. Choose the answer and write only the
letter (A–D) next to the question numbers (1.1 to 1.10) in the ANSWER BOOK,
e.g. 1.11 E.

1.1 Which ONE of the following terms describes hydrocarbons that contain only
single bonds?

A Isomers

B Saturated

C Unsaturated

D Homologous series (2)

1.2 Which ONE of the following combinations correctly indicates the


STRONGEST intermolecular forces found in ethanoic acid and methyl
propanoate respectively?

ETHANOIC ACID METHYL PROPANOATE


A Hydrogen bonds Hydrogen bonds
B Dipole-dipole forces London forces
C Hydrogen bonds London forces
D Hydrogen bonds Dipole-dipole forces (2)

1.3 A test tube contains a liquid hydrocarbon.

When bromine water (Br2) is added to the test tube, the mixture decolourises
IMMEDIATELY.

Which ONE of the following combinations correctly identifies the COMPOUND


and the TYPE OF REACTION that takes place in the test tube?

COMPOUND TYPE OF REACTION


A Hexane Addition
B Hexane Substitution
C Hex-2-ene Addition
D Hex-2-ene Substitution (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 4 DBE/November 2022
NSC

1.4 Which ONE of the following statements is the CORRECT definition for the rate
of a reaction?

A The time taken for the reaction to take place

B The speed at which the reaction takes place

C The rate of change in concentration of the products or reactants

D The rate of change in concentration of the products or reactants per unit


time (2)

1.5 Consider the balanced equation for the reaction between magnesium powder
and EXCESS dilute hydrochloric acid, HCℓ(aq):

Mg(s) + 2HCℓ(aq) → MgCℓ2(aq) + H2(g)

Which ONE of the following will NOT increase the rate of this reaction?

A Increasing the volume of HCℓ(aq)

B Increasing the temperature of HCℓ(aq)

C Increasing the concentration of HCℓ(aq)

D Adding more magnesium powder (2)

1.6 Two identical sealed gas jars, R and S, initially contain gases as shown
below.

1 mole H2(g) + 1 mole I2(g) 2 moles HI(g)


I2(g) I2(g)

Gas jar R Gas jar S

Equilibrium is reached in both gas jars at 500 °C according to the following


balanced equation:
H2(g) + I2(g) ⇌ 2HI(g)

Which ONE of the following statements is TRUE at equilibrium?

A S will contain 1 mole of I2(g).

B R will contain a larger amount of I2(g) than S.

C R and S will contain the same amount of HI(g).

D S will contain a larger amount of HI(g) than R. (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 5 DBE/November 2022
NSC

1.7 Which ONE of the following salts, when dissolved in water, will NOT change
the pH of the water?

A Na2CO3

B (COO)2Na2

C NH4Cℓ

D NaCℓ (2)

1.8 A dilute acid is titrated against a potassium hydroxide solution, KOH(aq).

At the equivalence point the pH is 7.

Which ONE of the following combinations correctly identifies the acid and the
MOST SUITABLE indicator for this titration?

ACID INDICATOR
A (COOH)2(aq) Phenolphthalein
B (COOH)2(aq) Bromothymol blue
C HCℓ(aq) Phenolphthalein
D HCℓ(aq) Bromothymol blue (2)

1.9 Which ONE of the following statements is TRUE for an oxidising agent?

A It gains electrons.

B It causes another species in the reaction to be reduced.

C Its oxidation number does not change during a chemical reaction.

D Its oxidation number increases during a chemical reaction. (2)

1.10 Which ONE of the following metals will reduce Cd2+(aq) to Cd(s), but will NOT
reduce Mn2+(aq) to Mn(s)?

A Zn

B Ag

C Ni

D Mg (2)
[20]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 6 DBE/November 2022
NSC

QUESTION 2 (Start on a new page.)

A to F in the table below represent six organic compounds.

CH3 H

CH3 C CH Br H C H
A B H
CH3 CH2 CH2
CH3 C C C C H
CH3 CH3 H
O O

C CH3 CH2 CH2 C D CH3 CH2 C

H CH3
O
CH3 CH2 CH2 CH2
E CH3 CH2 CH2 C F
OH
OH

2.1 Write down the:

2.1.1 Letters that represent TWO organic compounds that are isomers of
each other (1)

2.1.2 Type of isomers (CHAIN, FUNCTIONAL or POSITIONAL)


identified in QUESTION 2.1.1 (1)

2.1.3 GENERAL FORMULA of the homologous series to which


compound B belongs (1)

2.1.4 NAME of the functional group of compound F (1)

2.2 Write down the IUPAC name of:

2.2.1 Compound A (3)

2.2.2 Compound B (2)

2.2.3 Compound C (2)

2.3 Compound F reacts with a carboxylic acid to form compound S in the


presence of a strong acid.

2.3.1 Write down the type of reaction that takes place. (1)

Compound S has an EMPIRICAL FORMULA of C3H6O and a molecular mass


of 116 g∙mol-1.

2.3.2 Write down the MOLECULAR FORMULA of the carboxylic acid. (3)
[15]
Copyright reserved Please turn over
Physical Sciences/P2 7 DBE/November 2022
NSC

QUESTION 3 (Start on a new page.)

3.1 The melting points of some organic compounds are given in the table below.

COMPOUND IUPAC NAME MELTING POINTS (oC)


A Propanone -95,4
B Butanone -86,9
C Pentan-2-one -77,8
D 3-methylbutanone -92

3.1.1 To which homologous series do the above compounds belong? (1)

The melting points of compounds A, B and C are compared.

3.1.2 Write down the controlled variable for this comparison. (1)

The melting points of compounds C and D are compared.

3.1.3 Fully explain the difference in the melting points of these two
compounds. (4)

3.2 The table below shows the results obtained from an experiment to determine
the vapour pressure of different STRAIGHT CHAIN primary alcohols at 300 K.

ALCOHOL VAPOUR PRESSURE (kPa)


CH3OH 16,8
C2H5OH 7,88
C3H7OH 2,8
C4H9OH 0,91
C5H11OH 0,88
C6H13OH 0,124

3.2.1 Define the term vapour pressure. (2)

3.2.2 Write down a suitable conclusion for this investigation. (2)

3.2.3 Write down the IUPAC name of the alcohol with the HIGHEST
boiling point. (3)

3.2.4 The experiment is now repeated at 320 K.

Will the vapour pressure of each compound INCREASE,


DECREASE or REMAIN THE SAME? (1)
[14]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 8 DBE/November 2022
NSC

QUESTION 4 (Start on a new page.)

The flow diagram below shows how compound A can be used as a starting reactant to
prepare two different compounds.

I, II and III represent three organic reactions.

Compound A I Compound B
CH3C(CH3)BrCH2CH3 C5H10
(major product)

II
III
Compound C
C5H12O
(major product)

4.1 Is compound A a PRIMARY, SECONDARY or TERTIARY haloalkane? Give a


reason for the answer. (2)

4.2 Consider reaction I.

4.2.1 Besides heat, write down the other reaction condition needed. (1)

4.2.2 Write down the type of reaction that takes place. (1)

4.2.3 Using STRUCTURAL FORMULAE for the organic compounds,


write down a balanced equation for the reaction. (5)

4.3 Consider reaction II.

Write down the:

4.3.1 STRUCTURAL FORMULA of compound C (2)

4.3.2 NAME or FORMULA of the inorganic reagent needed (1)

4.3.3 Type of addition reaction that takes place (1)

4.4 Consider reaction III.

4.4.1 Write down of the type of reaction that takes place. (1)

4.4.2 Besides heat, write down the other reaction condition needed. (1)
[15]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 9 DBE/November 2022
NSC

QUESTION 5 (Start on a new page.)

Three experiments, A, B and C, are carried out to investigate some of the factors that
affect the rate of decomposition of hydrogen peroxide, H2O2(ℓ).

The balanced equation for the reaction is:

2H2O2(ℓ) → 2H2O(ℓ) + O2(g)

Identical samples of hydrogen peroxide are used in each experiment.

The conditions used in each experiment are summarised in the table below.

EXPERIMENT TEMPERATURE (°C)


A 25 Without catalyst
B 25 With catalyst
C 35 Without catalyst

5.1 In which experiment, A or B, is the reaction rate higher? Use the collision
theory to explain the answer. (4)

5.2 The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution curves, X and Y, for two of the above
experiments are shown below.

X
Number of molecules

Kinetic energy

Identify the curve (X or Y) that represents experiment C. (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 10 DBE/November 2022
NSC

5.3 The volume of oxygen gas, O2(g), produced in experiment B during the first
3,6 s is collected in a syringe, as shown below.

160 320 480 640 800 960


O2(g) 3
cm

5.3.1 Write down the volume of O2(g) collected in the syringe. (2)

The balanced equation for the reaction is:


2H2O2(ℓ) → 2H2O(ℓ) + O2(g)

5.3.2 Calculate the mass of water, H2O(ℓ), that was produced during the
first 3,6 s. Take the molar gas volume to be 24 000 cm3∙mol-1
at 25 °C. (4)

5.4 The graph below, NOT drawn to scale, is obtained for the mass of oxygen gas
produced over a period of time in experiment A.

0,9

0,8
Mass of oxygen (g)

0,6

0,4

0
3 9 20 t 30 36
Time (s)

Use the information in the graph to answer the following questions:

5.4.1 Write down the rate of production of oxygen gas for the interval
30 s to 36 s. (1)

5.4.2 Will the rate of the reaction in the interval 3 s to 9 s be GREATER


THAN, SMALLER THAN or EQUAL TO the rate of the reaction in
the interval 9 s to 20 s? (1)

5.4.3 The average rate of decomposition of hydrogen peroxide is


2,1 x 10-3 mol∙s-1.

Calculate the value of time t on the graph. (5)


[19]
Copyright reserved Please turn over
Physical Sciences/P2 11 DBE/November 2022
NSC

QUESTION 6 (Start on a new page.)

Carbon, C(s), reacts with sulphur, S(g), according to the following balanced equation:

C(s) + 2S(g) ⇌ CS2(g) ∆H > 0

The system reaches equilibrium at temperature T in a sealed 2 dm3 container.

The Kc value is 9,4 at temperature T.

6.1 State Le Chatelier's principle. (2)

At equilibrium, 1 mole of carbon disulphide, CS2(g), is present in the container.

6.2 Calculate the concentration of S(g) present at equilibrium. (4)

The volume of the container is now DOUBLED at temperature T. After a while, a NEW
equilibrium is established.

6.3 How will the amount of S(g) change as this new equilibrium is established?
Choose from INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME. (1)

6.4 Explain the answer to QUESTION 6.3 in terms of Le Chatelier's principle. (3)

6.5 If the concentration of CS2(g) CHANGES by x mol∙dm-3, write down an


expression for the equilibrium constant, Kc, in terms of x.

Show ALL your workings. NO simplification or solving for x is required. (5)

6.6 The reaction rate-time graph below represents further changes made to the
equilibrium mixture. The volume of the container is kept constant.

Forward reaction
Reverse reaction
Reaction rate

tA tB tC Time

6.6.1 What do the parallel lines between tA and tB represent? (1)

6.6.2 What change was made to the equilibrium mixture at tB? (1)

6.6.3 Give a reason for the sudden change in the reaction rate at tC. (1)

6.6.4 Fully explain the answer to QUESTION 6.6.3. (3)


[21]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 12 DBE/November 2022
NSC

QUESTION 7 (Start on a new page.)

7.1 Ethanoic acid is a weak acid that reacts with water according to the following
balanced equation:

CH3COOH(aq) + H2O(ℓ) ⇌ CH3COO─(aq) + H3O+(aq)

7.1.1 Define an acid in terms of the Lowry-Brønsted theory. (2)

7.1.2 Give a reason why ethanoic acid is classified as a WEAK acid. (1)

7.1.3 Write down the formulae of the TWO bases in the equation above. (2)

7.2 A flask contains 300 cm3 of dilute sodium hydroxide, NaOH(aq), of


concentration 0,167 mol·dm-3.

7.2.1 Calculate the number of moles of sodium hydroxide in the flask. (3)

Ethanoic acid of volume 500 cm3 and of unknown concentration, X, is now


added to this flask to give a solution of volume 800 cm3.

It is found that the pH of the mixture is 11,4.

The balanced equation for the reaction is:

NaOH(aq) + CH3COOH(aq) → CH3COONa(aq) + H2O(ℓ)

Calculate the:

7.2.2 Concentration of the OH─(aq) in the mixture (4)

7.2.3 Initial concentration, X, of the ethanoic acid solution (6)


[18]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 13 DBE/November 2022
NSC

QUESTION 8 (Start on a new page.)

8.1 A piece of zinc (Zn) is placed in a test tube containing an acidified



permanganate solution, MnO (aq). After some time, it is found that a redox
reaction has taken place.

Use the Table of Standard Reduction Potentials to answer the following


questions:

8.1.1 Write down the NAME or FORMULA of the reducing agent. (1)

8.1.2 Refer to the relative strengths of the OXIDISING AGENTS to


explain why a redox reaction has taken place. (3)

8.2 A standard electrochemical cell is set up as shown below.

Ni Mn
Y

Ni2+(aq) Mn2+(aq)

8.2.1 Write down the function of component Y. (1)

8.2.2 In which direction will electrons flow in the external circuit? Choose
from 'Ni to Mn' OR 'Mn to Ni'. (2)

8.2.3 Calculate the initial emf of this cell. (4)

8.2.4 Write down the balanced equation for the net cell reaction taking
place. (3)

8.2.5 The concentration of Ni2+(aq) is now increased.

Will the reading on the voltmeter INCREASE, DECREASE or


REMAIN THE SAME? (1)
[15]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 14 DBE/November 2022
NSC

QUESTION 9 (Start on a new page.)

The diagram below represents a simplified cell used for the electrolysis of
CONCENTRATED chromium(III) chloride, CrCℓ3(aq). Electrodes R and T are made of
carbon.

Battery

R T

Concentrated
CrCℓ3(aq)

The net cell reaction is: 2CrCℓ3(aq) → 2Cr(s) + 3Cℓ2(g)

9.1 Define the term electrolysis. (2)

9.2 The graph below, NOT drawn to scale, represents the changes in the mass of
electrode T during electrolysis.

X
Mass of electrode T (g)

2,2
0
10
Time (hours)
9.2.1 Write down the half-reaction that takes place at electrode T. (2)

A current of 2,5 A passes through the cell for 10 hours.

Calculate the:

9.2.2 Total charge that flows through the cell during this time (3)

9.2.3 Value of X as shown on the graph (6)


[13]

TOTAL: 150
Copyright reserved
NATIONAL
SENIOR CERTIFICATE

GRADE 12

PHYSICAL SCIENCES: CHEMISTRY (P2)

NOVEMBER 2023

MARKS: 150

TIME: 3 hours

This question paper consists of 16 pages and 4 data sheets.

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 2 DBE/November 2023
NSC

INSTRUCTIONS AND INFORMATION

1. Write your centre number and examination number in the appropriate spaces
on the ANSWER BOOK.

2. This question paper consists of NINE questions. Answer ALL the questions in
the ANSWER BOOK.

3. Start EACH question on a NEW page in the ANSWER BOOK.

4. Number the answers correctly according to the numbering system used in this
question paper.

5. Leave ONE line between two subquestions, e.g. between QUESTION 2.1 and
QUESTION 2.2.

6. You may use a non-programmable calculator.

7. You may use appropriate mathematical instruments.

8. Show ALL formulae and substitutions in ALL calculations.

9. Round off your FINAL numerical answers to a minimum of TWO decimal


places.

10. Give brief motivations, discussions, etc. where required.

11. You are advised to use the attached DATA SHEETS.

12. Write neatly and legibly.

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 3 DBE/November 2023
NSC

QUESTION 1: MULTIPLE-CHOICE QUESTIONS

Various options are provided as possible answers to the following questions.


Each question has only ONE correct answer. Choose the answer and write only the
letter (A–D) next to the question numbers (1.1 to 1.10) in the ANSWER BOOK,
e.g. 1.11 E.

1.1 Which ONE of the following represents a straight chain SATURATED


hydrocarbon?

A C5H8

B C5H10

C C6H12

D C6H14 (2)

1.2 Which ONE of the following is a SECONDARY alcohol?

A C(CH3)3OH

B CH3(CH2)3OH

C CH3(CH2)2CHO

D CH3CH2CH(OH)CH3 (2)

1.3 Which ONE of the following is a HYDROLYSIS reaction?

A CH3CH2Br + H2O  CH3CH2OH + HBr

B CH3CH2OH + HBr  CH3CH2Br + H2O

C CH2CH2 + H2O  CH3CH2OH

D CH2CH2 + H2  CH3CH3 (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 4 DBE/November 2023
NSC

1.4 Hydrochloric acid reacts with EXCESS zinc:

Zn(s) + 2HCℓ(aq) → ZnCℓ2(aq) + H2(g)

Different reaction conditions are shown in the diagrams below. The mass of
zinc used is the same in both test tubes.

Test tube X Test tube Y

100 cm3
0,1 mol∙dm-3 HCℓ(aq) 200 cm3
0,1 mol∙dm-3 HCℓ(aq)
Zn powder Zn lumps

How will the INITIAL rate of reaction and FINAL VOLUME of H 2(g) produced
in test tube Y compare with that in test tube X?

INITIAL RATE OF FINAL VOLUME


REACTION IN Y OF H2(G) IN Y
A Higher Equal
B Lower More
C Lower Equal
D Higher More (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 5 DBE/November 2023
NSC

1.5 The diagram below represents a mixture of NO2(g) and N2O4(g) molecules at
equilibrium in a 1 dm3 container at T °C.

KEY

NO2

N2O4

The balanced equation for this reaction is:

2NO2(g) ⇌ N2O4(g)

Which ONE of the following is TRUE for the value of the equilibrium constant,
Kc, for the reaction at T °C?

A Kc = 24

B Kc > 1

C Kc = 1

D 0 < Kc < 1 (2)

1.6 A reaction is at equilibrium in a closed container according to the following


balanced equation:

4CuO(s) ⇌ 2Cu2O(s) + O2(g)

The volume of the container is now increased while the temperature remains
constant. A new equilibrium is reached.

Which ONE of the following combinations is CORRECT for the new


equilibrium?

CONCENTRATION NUMBER of EQUILIBRIUM


OF O2 MOLES OF O2 CONSTANT (Kc)
A Decreases Remains the same Increases

B Remains the same Decreases Remains the same

C Remains the same Increases Remains the same

D Decreases Increases Remains the same


(2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 6 DBE/November 2023
NSC

1.7 Nitric acid, HNO3(aq), and ethanoic acid, CH3COOH(aq), of equal volumes
and concentrations are compared.

Consider the following statements regarding these solutions:

(i) They have different pH values.


(ii) Both have the same electrical conductivity.
(iii) Both solutions require the same number of moles of KOH(aq) for
complete neutralisation.

Which of the above statement(s) is/are TRUE?

A (i) only

B (i) and (ii) only

C (i) and (iii) only

D (ii) and (iii) only (2)

1.8 The apparatus in the diagram below is used for the titration between HCℓ(aq)
and KOH(aq).

HCℓ(aq)

Titration mixture

In a titration, the learner accidentally exceeds the endpoint. Which ONE of the
following will be TRUE for the titration mixture?

A [H+] > [OH−] and pH < 7

B [H+] < [OH−] and pH < 7

C [H+] < [OH−] and pH > 7

D [H+] > [OH−] and pH > 7 (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 7 DBE/November 2023
NSC

1.9 The following hypothetical standard reduction potentials relate to a galvanic


cell:

X2+(aq) + 2e → X(s) EƟ = +0,10 V


Y+(aq) + e → Y(s) EƟ = –0,10 V

Consider the following statements for this galvanic cell:

(i) The emf of the cell is 0,20 V under standard conditions.


(ii) Electrode Y is the anode.
(iii) X is oxidised.

Which of the above statement(s) is/are TRUE for this galvanic cell?

A (i) only

B (i) and (ii) only

C (i) and (iii) only

D (ii) and (iii) only (2)

1.10 Which ONE of the half-reactions below will be the MAIN reaction at the
ANODE during the electrolysis of CONCENTRATED CuCℓ2(aq)?

A Cu2+(aq) + 2e → Cu(s)



B 2H2O(ℓ) + 2e → H2(g) + 2OH (aq)

C 2H2O(ℓ) → O2(g) + 4H+(aq) + 4e



D 2Cℓ (aq) → Cℓ2(g) + 2e (2)
[20]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 8 DBE/November 2023
NSC

QUESTION 2 (Start on a new page.)

The letters A to H in the table below represent eight organic compounds.

A Heptanoic acid B CH3(CH2)3COOCH3

C 4-ethyl-3,3-difluorohexane D Hexanoic acid


CH2 O

E CH3 CH C CH3 F CH3 CH C CH2 CH3


CH3 CH3
CH3
H H O H
CH3 C CH2 CH3
G H H C C C C H
C O
H H H
H O

2.1 Define the term organic compound. (1)

2.2 Write down the IUPAC name of compound:

2.2.1 E (2)

2.2.2 H (2)

2.3 Write down the:

2.3.1 STRUCTURAL formula of compound B (2)

2.3.2 STRUCTURAL formula of compound C (3)

2.3.3 General formula of the homologous series to which compound E


belongs (1)

2.3.4 STRUCTURAL formula of the FUNCTIONAL group of compound F (1)

2.3.5 IUPAC name of the alcohol needed to produce compound B (2)

2.4 Write down the letter(s) of the compound(s) that:

2.4.1 Is a FUNCTIONAL isomer of compound G (1)

2.4.2 Are CHAIN isomers of each other (1)


[16]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 9 DBE/November 2023
NSC

QUESTION 3 (Start on a new page.)

The relationship between boiling point and the molecular mass of aldehydes,
carboxylic acids and primary alcohols is investigated. Curves P, R and S are obtained.
All compounds used are straight chain molecules.

GRAPH OF BOILING POINT VERSUS MOLECULAR MASS

250

P

200

 R
Boiling point (°C)



GRAPH OF BOILING POINT VERSUS MOLECULAR MASS
 S
150
 

 

 
100 

 

50 

0
30 50 70 90 110 130
Molecular mass (g·mol-1)

3.1 Define the term boiling point. (2)

3.2 Write down the conclusion that can be made for curve P. (2)

3.3 Explain the answer to QUESTION 3.2 in terms of the structures of the
compounds. (2)

3.4 Curve R represents the alcohols.

3.4.1 Which homologous series is represented by curve S? (1)

3.4.2 Explain the answer to QUESTION 3.4.1 by referring to the strength


of intermolecular forces. (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 10 DBE/November 2023
NSC

3.5 For curve R, write down the:

3.5.1 Molecular mass of the compound with a boiling point of 97 °C (1)

3.5.2 IUPAC name of the compound in QUESTION 3.5.1 (2)

3.6 Two compounds, A and B, used in this investigation have a molecular mass
of 74 g∙mol-1. A has a boiling point of 118 °C and B a boiling point of 142 °C.
Explain the difference in these boiling points by referring to the structures of
these compounds. (3)
[15]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 11 DBE/November 2023
NSC

QUESTION 4 (Start on a new page.)

4.1 Consider the cracking reaction below.

C16H34 C6H14 + C6Hx + 2CyHz

4.1.1 Define cracking. (2)

4.1.2 Write down the values represented by x, y and z in the equation


above. (3)

Compound C6H14 undergoes complete combustion.

4.1.3 Using MOLECULAR FORMULAE, write down the balanced


equation for this reaction. (3)

4.2 Consider the equations for reactions I to III below.

A and B represent organic compounds that are POSITIONAL ISOMERS.


X is an inorganic product.

I CH3CH2CHCHCH3 + HCℓ  A + B
H2O
II A CH3CH2CH2CH(OH)CH3 + X
Δ
III CH3CH2CH2CH(OH)CH3 CH3CH2CHCHCH3 + H2O

Write down the:

4.2.1 Definition of positional isomers (2)

4.2.2 Type of reaction represented by reaction I (1)

4.2.3 STRUCTURAL formula of compound B (3)

4.2.4 Formula of X (1)

4.2.5 Inorganic reagent for reaction lll (1)

Compound A can be converted directly to the organic product of reaction lll.

4.2.6 Besides heat, write down the reaction condition needed for this
conversion. (1)

4.2.7 Write down TWO terms that describe this type of reaction. (2)
[19]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 12 DBE/November 2023
NSC

QUESTION 5 (Start on a new page.)

The reaction between EXCESS dilute hydrochloric acid and sodium thiosulphate is
used to investigate factors that influence reaction rate.

Na2S2O3(aq) + 2HCℓ(aq) → 2NaCℓ(aq) + S(s) + H2O(ℓ) + SO2(g)

The concentration of HCℓ(aq) used is 1 mol·dm-3. The same volume of HCℓ(aq) is used
in each run.

The time taken for the cross on the paper under the flask to become invisible is
measured.

Flask

Na2S2O3(aq) + HCℓ(aq)

White paper

The table below summarises the reaction conditions and results of the experiment.

VOLUME VOLUME H2O(ℓ) CONCENTRATION


TIME
RUN Na2S2O3(aq) ADDED Na2S2O3(aq)
(s)
(cm3) (cm3) (mol·dm-3)
1 50 0 0,13 20,4
2 40 10 0,10 26,7
3 30 20 P 33,3

5.1 Define reaction rate. (2)

5.2 Write down the independent variable for this investigation. (1)

5.3 Calculate the value of P in the table. (3)

5.4 When 0,21 g of sulphur has formed in Run 1, the cross becomes invisible.

Calculate the average reaction rate with respect to sodium thiosulphate,


Na2S2O3(aq), in g·s-1. (5)

Another investigation is performed at different temperatures.

5.5 Sketch the Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution curve for the reaction at 20 °C.
Label this curve as A. On the same set of axis, draw the curve that will be
obtained at 35 °C and label it as B. (4)

5.6 Explain the effect of temperature on reaction rate in terms of the collision
theory. (4)
[19]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 13 DBE/November 2023
NSC

QUESTION 6 (Start on a new page.)

Consider the following hypothetical reaction reaching equilibrium in a 4 dm3 closed


container at 150 °C.
2AB(g) ⇌ A2(g) + B2(g)

The graph below shows the changes in the amounts of reactants and products over
time.

14
AB(g)
12
Number of moles (mol)

10

8 A2(g)

2
B2(g)

0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Time (s)

6.1 Write down the meaning of the term reversible reaction. (1)

6.2 State Le Chatelier's principle. (2)

6.3 A change was made to the equilibrium mixture at t = 80 s.

6.3.1 Write down the change made at t = 80 s. (1)

6.3.2 Use Le Chatelier's principle to explain how the system reacts to


this change. (2)

6.4 Calculate the equilibrium constant, Kc, at t = 120 s. (4)

6.5 At t = 130 s the temperature of the system is decreased to 100 °C.


6.5.1 Draw a potential energy diagram for this reaction. (3)
6.5.2 Will the equilibrium constant, Kc, at 100 °C be GREATER THAN,
LESS THAN or EQUAL TO the Kc at 150 °C? Explain the answer. (3)

6.6 The initial reaction now takes place in the presence of a catalyst at 150 °C.

Describe the changes that will be observed on the graph between t = 0 s and
t = 60 s. (3)
[19]
Copyright reserved Please turn over
Physical Sciences/P2 14 DBE/November 2023
NSC

QUESTION 7 (Start on a new page.)

To identify metal M in an unknown metal carbonate, MCO3, the following procedure is


carried out:

Step 1: 0,198 g of IMPURE MCO3 is reacted with 25 cm3 of 0,4 mol∙dm-3 nitric acid,
HNO3(aq).

Step 2: The EXCESS HNO3(aq) is then neutralised with 20 cm3 of 0,15 mol∙dm-3 barium
hydroxide, Ba(OH)2(aq).

Assume that the volumes are additive.

The following reactions take place:

2HNO3(aq) + MCO3(s) → M(NO3)2(aq) + CO2(g) + H2O(ℓ)

2HNO3(aq) + Ba(OH)2(aq) → Ba(NO3)2(aq) + 2H2O(ℓ)

7.1 Define the term strong base. (2)

7.2 Calculate the:

7.2.1 Number of moles of Ba(OH)2(aq) that reacted with the excess


HNO3(aq) (3)

7.2.2 pH of the solution after Step 1 (5)

7.3 The percentage purity of the MCO3(s) in the sample is 85%. Identify metal M. (8)
[18]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 15 DBE/November 2023
NSC

QUESTION 8 (Start on a new page.)

A cleaned pure copper strip, Cu(s), is placed in a beaker containing a colourless


silver nitrate solution, AgNO3(aq), at 25 °C, as shown below.

AgNO3(aq) Copper strip

After a while, it is observed that the solution in the beaker becomes blue.
8.1 Write down:
8.1.1 ONE other OBSERVABLE change, besides the solution turning
blue (1)
8.1.2 The NAME or FORMULA of the oxidising agent (1)
8.2 Explain the answer to QUESTION 8.1.1 by referring to the relative strengths
of the oxidising agents or reducing agents. (3)
A galvanic cell is now set up using Cu and Ag strips as electrodes. A simplified
diagram of the cell is shown below.

A(s)

B Ag+(aq)

8.3 Write down the:


8.3.1 NAME or FORMULA of electrode A (1)
8.3.2 NAME or FORMULA of solution B (1)
8.3.3 Overall (net) balanced equation for the cell reaction (3)

8.4 The salt bridge contains potassium nitrate, KNO3(aq).


Write down the FORMULA of the ion in the salt bridge that will move
into the silver ion solution. Choose from K+(aq) or NO (aq).
Give a reason for the answer. (2)
[12]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 16 DBE/November 2023
NSC

QUESTION 9 (Start on a new page.)

An electrolytic cell is set up to purify a piece of copper that contains silver and zinc as
impurities. A simplified diagram of the cell is shown below. Electrode R is impure
copper.

Power
source

Electrode Q Electrode R

Electrolyte Silver

9.1 Define the term electrolysis. (2)

9.2 Write down the reaction taking place at electrode Q. (2)

9.3 In which direction do the electrons flow in the external circuit? Choose from
Q to R or R to Q. (1)

9.4 Calculate the current needed to form 16 g of copper when the cell operates
for five hours. (5)

9.5 During this electrolysis, only copper and zinc are oxidised.

Give a reason why the silver is not oxidised. (2)


[12]

TOTAL: 150

Copyright reserved
Physical Sciences/P2 1 DBE/November 2023
NSC

DATA FOR PHYSICAL SCIENCES GRADE 12


PAPER 2 (CHEMISTRY)

GEGEWENS VIR FISIESE WETENSKAPPE GRAAD 12


VRAESTEL 2 (CHEMIE)

TABLE 1: PHYSICAL CONSTANTS/TABEL 1: FISIESE KONSTANTES

NAME/NAAM SYMBOL/SIMBOOL VALUE/WAARDE


Standard pressure
p 1,013 x 105 Pa
Standaarddruk
Molar gas volume at STP
Vm 22,4 dm3∙mol-1
Molêre gasvolume by STD
Standard temperature
Standaardtemperatuur T 273 K
Charge on electron
e -1,6 x 10-19 C
Lading op elektron
Avogadro's constant
NA 6,02 x 1023 mol-1
Avogadro-konstante

TABLE 2: FORMULAE/TABEL 2: FORMULES

m N
n= n=
N
n m
c= or/of c= n=
m
a a na
pH = -log[H3O+]
n

Kw = [H3O+][OH-] = 1 x 10-14 at/by 298 K

Eθcell  Eθcathode  Eθanode / Eθsel  Ekatode


θ
 Eθanode

or/of
Eθcell  Ereduction
θ
 Eθoxidation / Eθsel  Ereduksie
θ
 Eθoksidasie

or/of
Eθcell  Eθoxidisingagent  Ereducing
θ
agent / E sel  Eoksideermiddel  Ereduseermiddel
θ θ θ

n= where n is the number of electrons/


I= qe waar n die aantal elektrone is

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 2 DBE/November 2023
NSC
TABLE 3: THE PERIODIC TABLE OF ELEMENTS
TABEL 3: DIE PERIODIEKE TABEL VAN ELEMENTE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
(I) (II) (III) (IV) (V) (VI) (VII) (VIII)
Atomic number
1 KEY/SLEUTEL Atoomgetal 2
2,1

H He
1 29 4
3 4 Electronegativity Symbol 5 6 7 8 9 10
Cu

1,9
1,0

1,5

2,0

2,5

3,0

3,5

4,0
Li Be Elektronegatiwiteit
63,5
Simbool B C N O F Ne
7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Aℓ Cℓ
0,9

1,2

1,5

1,8

2,1

2,5

3,0
Na Mg Approximate relative atomic mass Si P S Ar
23 24 Benaderde relatiewe atoommassa 27 28 31 32 35,5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
0,8

1,0

1,3

1,5

1,6

1,6

1,5

1,8

1,8

1,8

1,9

1,6

1,6

1,8

2,0

2,4

2,8
K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 63,5 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
0,8

1,0

1,2

1,4

1,8

1,9

2,2

2,2

2,2

1,9

1,7

1,7

1,8

1,9

2,1

2,5
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe
86 88 89 91 92 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
55 56 57 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
Tℓ
0,7

0,9

1,6

1,8

1,8

1,9

2,0

2,5
Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Pb Bi Po At Rn
133 137 139 179 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209
87 88 89
0,7

0,9

Fr Ra Ac 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
226
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
140 141 144 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
232 238

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 3 DBE/November 2023
NSC
TABLE 4A: STANDARD REDUCTION POTENTIALS
TABEL 4A: STANDAARD-REDUKSIEPOTENSIALE
Half-reactions/Halfreaksies E θ (V)

F2(g) + 2e ⇌ 2F + 2,87
+ e
3+ 2+
Co ⇌ Co + 1,81
+ 
H2O2 + 2H +2e ⇌ 2H2O +1,77
  2+

+
MnO 4 + 8H + 5e Mn + 4H2O + 1,51
 
Cℓ2(g) + 2e ⇌ 2Cℓ + 1,36
2  3+

+
Cr2O 7 + 14H + 6e 2Cr + 7H2O + 1,33
+ 
O2(g) + 4H + 4e ⇌ 2H2O + 1,23

Increasing strength of reducing agents/Toenemende sterkte van reduseermiddels


+  2+
MnO2 + 4H + 2e ⇌ Mn + 2H2O + 1,23
Increasing strength of oxidising agents/Toenemende sterkte van oksideermiddels

2+ 
Pt + 2e ⇌ Pt + 1,20

Br2(ℓ) + 2e ⇌ 2Br + 1,07

+ 4H + 3e
+
NO 3 ⇌ NO(g) + 2H2O + 0,96
2+ 
Hg + 2e ⇌ Hg(ℓ) + 0,85
Ag + e
+
⇌ Ag + 0,80
 + 
NO 3 + 2H + e ⇌ NO2(g) + H2O + 0,80
3+  2+
Fe +e ⇌ Fe + 0,77
+ 
O2(g) + 2H + 2e ⇌ H2O2 + 0,68

I2 + 2e ⇌ 2I + 0,54
+ 
Cu + e ⇌ Cu + 0,52
SO2 + 4H + 4e
+
⇌ S + 2H2O + 0,45
 
2H2O + O2 + 4e ⇌ 4OH + 0,40
+ 2e
2+
Cu ⇌ Cu + 0,34
2 

+
SO 4 + 4H + 2e SO2(g) + 2H2O + 0,17
2+  +
Cu +e ⇌ Cu + 0,16
4+  2+
Sn + 2e ⇌ Sn + 0,15
S + 2H + 2e
+
⇌ H2S(g) + 0,14
+ 
2H + 2e ⇌ H2(g) 0,00
+ 3e  0,06
3+
Fe ⇌ Fe
+ 2e  0,13
2+
Pb ⇌ Pb
+ 2e  0,14
2+
Sn ⇌ Sn

 0,27
2+
Ni + 2e ⇌ Ni
+ 2e  0,28
2+
Co ⇌ Co
+ 2e  0,40
2+
Cd ⇌ Cd
 2+
 0,41
3+
Cr +e ⇌ Cr
+ 2e  0,44
2+
Fe ⇌ Fe

 0,74
3+
Cr + 3e ⇌ Cr
+ 2e  0,76
2+
Zn ⇌ Zn
 
2H2O + 2e ⇌ H2(g) + 2OH  0,83
+ 2e  0,91
2+
Cr ⇌ Cr

 1,18
2+
Mn + 2e ⇌ Mn
+ 3e  1,66
3+
ℓ ⇌ ℓ

 2,36
2+
Mg + 2e ⇌ Mg
Na + e  2,71
+
⇌ Na
+ 2e  2,87
2+
Ca ⇌ Ca

 2,89
2+
Sr + 2e ⇌ Sr
+ 2e  2,90
2+
Ba ⇌ Ba
+ -
Cs + e ⇌ Cs - 2,92
K + e  2,93
+
⇌ K
Li + e  3,05
+
⇌ Li

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 4 DBE/November 2023
NSC
TABLE 4B: STANDARD REDUCTION POTENTIALS
TABEL 4B: STANDAARD-REDUKSIEPOTENSIALE
Half-reactions/Halfreaksies E θ (V)
Li + e  3,05
+
⇌ Li

 2,93
+
K +e ⇌ K
Cs + e  2,92
+
⇌ Cs

 2,90
2+
Ba + 2e ⇌ Ba
Sr + 2e  2,89
2+
⇌ Sr

 2,87
2+
Ca + 2e ⇌ Ca
Na + e  2,71
+
⇌ Na

Increasing strength of reducing agents/Toenemende sterkte van reduseermiddels



 2,36
Increasing strength of oxidising agents/Toenemende sterkte van oksideermiddels

2+
Mg + 2e ⇌ Mg
+ 3e  1,66
3+
ℓ ⇌ ℓ

 1,18
2+
Mn + 2e ⇌ Mn
+ 2e  0,91
2+
Cr ⇌ Cr
2H2O + 2e ⇌ H2(g) + 2OH  0,83

 0,76
2+
Zn + 2e ⇌ Zn
+ 3e  0,74
3+
Cr ⇌ Cr

 0,44
2+
Fe + 2e ⇌ Fe
+ e
2+
 0,41
3+
Cr ⇌ Cr

 0,40
2+
Cd + 2e ⇌ Cd
+ 2e  0,28
2+
Co ⇌ Co

 0,27
2+
Ni + 2e ⇌ Ni
+ 2e  0,14
2+
Sn ⇌ Sn

 0,13
2+
Pb + 2e ⇌ Pb
+ 3e  0,06
3+
Fe ⇌ Fe
2H + 2e
+
⇌ H2(g) 0,00
S + 2H + 2e
+
⇌ H2S(g) + 0,14
+ 2e
4+ 2+
Sn ⇌ Sn + 0,15
2+  +
Cu +e ⇌ Cu + 0,16
2 

+
SO 4 + 4H + 2e SO2(g) + 2H2O + 0,17
2+ 
Cu + 2e ⇌ Cu + 0,34
 
2H2O + O2 + 4e ⇌ 4OH + 0,40
+ 
SO2 + 4H + 4e ⇌ S + 2H2O + 0,45
Cu + e
+
⇌ Cu + 0,52
 
I2 + 2e ⇌ 2I + 0,54
O2(g) + 2H + 2e
+
⇌ H2O2 + 0,68
3+  2+
Fe +e ⇌ Fe + 0,77
 + 
NO 3 + 2H + e ⇌ NO2(g) + H2O + 0,80
+ 
Ag + e ⇌ Ag + 0,80
+ 2e
2+
Hg ⇌ Hg(ℓ) + 0,85

+ 4H + 3e
+
NO 3 ⇌ NO(g) + 2H2O + 0,96
 
Br2(ℓ) + 2e ⇌ 2Br + 1,07
+ 2 e
2+
Pt ⇌ Pt + 1,20
+  2+
MnO2 + 4H + 2e ⇌ Mn + 2H2O + 1,23
O2(g) + 4H + 4e
+
⇌ 2H2O + 1,23
2  3+

+
Cr2O 7 + 14H + 6e 2Cr + 7H2O + 1,33
 
Cℓ2(g) + 2e ⇌ 2Cℓ + 1,36
 2+
+ 8H + 5e ⇌
+
MnO 4
Mn + 4H2O + 1,51
H2O2 + 2H +2 e
+
⇌ 2H2O +1,77
3+  2+
Co +e ⇌ Co + 1,81

F2(g) + 2e ⇌ 2F + 2,87

Copyright reserved
Physical Sciences/P2 1 DBE/November 2022
NSC

DATA FOR PHYSICAL SCIENCES GRADE 12


PAPER 2 (CHEMISTRY)

GEGEWENS VIR FISIESE WETENSKAPPE GRAAD 12


VRAESTEL 2 (CHEMIE)

TABLE 1: PHYSICAL CONSTANTS/TABEL 1: FISIESE KONSTANTES

NAME/NAAM SYMBOL/SIMBOOL VALUE/WAARDE


Standard pressure
p 1,013 x 105 Pa
Standaarddruk
Molar gas volume at STP
Vm 22,4 dm3∙mol-1
Molêre gasvolume by STD
Standard temperature
Standaardtemperatuur T 273 K
Charge on electron
e -1,6 x 10-19 C
Lading op elektron
Avogadro's constant
NA 6,02 x 1023 mol-1
Avogadro-konstante

TABLE 2: FORMULAE/TABEL 2: FORMULES

m N
n n
M NA
n m V
c or/of c n
V MV Vm
ca a na
pH = -log[H3O+]
c n

Kw = [H3O+][OH-] = 1 x 10-14 at/by 298 K

Eθcell  Eθcathode  Eθanode / Eθsel  Ekatode


θ
 Eθanode

or/of
Eθcell  Ereduction
θ
 Eθoxidation / Eθsel  Ereduksie
θ
 Eθoksidasie

or/of
Eθcell  Eθoxidisingagent  Ereducing
θ
agent / E sel  Eoksideermiddel  Ereduseermiddel
θ θ θ

q = I∆t

n = or/of n=
e qe

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 2 DBE/November 2022
NSC
TABLE 3: THE PERIODIC TABLE OF ELEMENTS
TABEL 3: DIE PERIODIEKE TABEL VAN ELEMENTE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
(I) (II) (III) (IV) (V) (VI) (VII) (VIII)
Atomic number
1 KEY/SLEUTEL Atoomgetal 2
2,1

H He
1 29 4
3 4 Electronegativity Symbol 5 6 7 8 9 10
Cu

1,9
1,0

1,5

2,0

2,5

3,0

3,5

4,0
Li Be Elektronegatiwiteit
63,5
Simbool B C N O F Ne
7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Aℓ Cℓ
0,9

1,2

1,5

1,8

2,1

2,5

3,0
Na Mg Approximate relative atomic mass Si P S Ar
23 24 Benaderde relatiewe atoommassa 27 28 31 32 35,5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
0,8

1,0

1,3

1,5

1,6

1,6

1,5

1,8

1,8

1,8

1,9

1,6

1,6

1,8

2,0

2,4

2,8
K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 63,5 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
0,8

1,0

1,2

1,4

1,8

1,9

2,2

2,2

2,2

1,9

1,7

1,7

1,8

1,9

2,1

2,5
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe
86 88 89 91 92 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
55 56 57 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
Tℓ
0,7

0,9

1,6

1,8

1,8

1,9

2,0

2,5
Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Pb Bi Po At Rn
133 137 139 179 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209
87 88 89
0,7

0,9

Fr Ra Ac 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
226
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
140 141 144 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
232 238

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 3 DBE/November 2022
NSC
TABLE 4A: STANDARD REDUCTION POTENTIALS
TABEL 4A: STANDAARD-REDUKSIEPOTENSIALE
Half-reactions/Halfreaksies E θ (V)
F2(g) + 2e ⇌ 2F + 2,87
3+  2+
Co +e ⇌ Co + 1,81
+ 
H2O2 + 2H +2e ⇌ 2H2O +1,77
  2+

+
MnO 4 + 8H + 5e Mn + 4H2O + 1,51
 
Cℓ2(g) + 2e ⇌ 2Cℓ + 1,36
2  3+

+
Cr2O 7 + 14H + 6e 2Cr + 7H2O + 1,33
+ 
O2(g) + 4H + 4e ⇌ 2H2O + 1,23
MnO2 + 4H + 2e
+ 2+

Increasing strength of oxidising agents/Toenemende sterkte van oksideermiddels

Mn + 2H2O + 1,23

Increasing strength of reducing agents/Toenemende sterkte van reduseermiddels


2+ 
Pt + 2e ⇌ Pt + 1,20
Br2(ℓ) + 2e ⇌ 2Br + 1,07
 + 
NO 3 + 4H + 3e ⇌ NO(g) + 2H2O + 0,96
2+ 
Hg + 2e ⇌ Hg(ℓ) + 0,85
+ 
Ag + e ⇌ Ag + 0,80
 + 
NO 3 + 2H + e ⇌ NO2(g) + H2O + 0,80
3+  2+
Fe +e ⇌ Fe + 0,77
O2(g) + 2H + 2e
+
⇌ H2O2 + 0,68
 
I2 + 2e ⇌ 2I + 0,54
Cu + e
+
⇌ Cu + 0,52
+ 
SO2 + 4H + 4e ⇌ S + 2H2O + 0,45
2H2O + O2 + 4e ⇌ 4OH + 0,40
2+ 
Cu + 2e ⇌ Cu + 0,34
2 

+
SO 4 + 4H + 2e SO2(g) + 2H2O + 0,17
2+  +
Cu +e ⇌ Cu + 0,16
+ 2e
4+ 2+
Sn ⇌ Sn + 0,15
+ 
S + 2H + 2e ⇌ H2S(g) + 0,14
2H + 2e
+
⇌ H2(g) 0,00

 0,06
3+
Fe + 3e ⇌ Fe
+ 2e  0,13
2+
Pb ⇌ Pb

 0,14
2+
Sn + 2e ⇌ Sn
+ 2e  0,27
2+
Ni ⇌ Ni

 0,28
2+
Co + 2e ⇌ Co
+ 2e  0,40
2+
Cd ⇌ Cd
+ e
2+
 0,41
3+
Cr ⇌ Cr

 0,44
2+
Fe + 2e ⇌ Fe
+ 3e  0,74
3+
Cr ⇌ Cr

 0,76
2+
Zn + 2e ⇌ Zn
2H2O + 2e ⇌ H2(g) + 2OH  0,83

 0,91
2+
Cr + 2e ⇌ Cr
+ 2e  1,18
2+
Mn ⇌ Mn

 1,66
3+
Aℓ + 3e ⇌ Aℓ
+ 2e  2,36
2+
Mg ⇌ Mg

 2,71
+
Na + e ⇌ Na
+ 2e  2,87
2+
Ca ⇌ Ca
Sr + 2e  2,89
2+
⇌ Sr

 2,90
2+
Ba + 2e ⇌ Ba
+ -
Cs + e ⇌ Cs - 2,92

 2,93
+
K +e ⇌ K
Li + e  3,05
+
⇌ Li

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 4 DBE/November 2022
NSC
TABLE 4B: STANDARD REDUCTION POTENTIALS
TABEL 4B: STANDAARD-REDUKSIEPOTENSIALE
Half-reactions/Halfreaksies E θ (V)
Li + e  3,05
+
⇌ Li
K + e  2,93
+
⇌ K

 2,92
+
Cs + e ⇌ Cs
+ 2e  2,90
2+
Ba ⇌ Ba

 2,89
2+
Sr + 2e ⇌ Sr
+ 2e  2,87
2+
Ca ⇌ Ca

 2,71
+
Na + e ⇌ Na
+ 2e  2,36
2+
Mg ⇌ Mg

 1,66

Increasing strength of reducing agents/Toenemende sterkte van reduseermiddels


3+
Aℓ + 3e ⇌ Aℓ
Increasing strength of oxidising agents/Toenemende sterkte van oksideermiddels

+ 2e  1,18
2+
Mn ⇌ Mn

 0,91
2+
Cr + 2e ⇌ Cr
2H2O + 2e ⇌ H2(g) + 2OH  0,83
+ 2e  0,76
2+
Zn ⇌ Zn

 0,74
3+
Cr + 3e ⇌ Cr
+ 2e  0,44
2+
Fe ⇌ Fe
 2+
 0,41
3+
Cr +e ⇌ Cr
+ 2e  0,40
2+
Cd ⇌ Cd

 0,28
2+
Co + 2e ⇌ Co
+ 2e  0,27
2+
Ni ⇌ Ni

 0,14
2+
Sn + 2e ⇌ Sn
+ 2e  0,13
2+
Pb ⇌ Pb

 0,06
3+
Fe + 3e ⇌ Fe
2H + 2e
+
⇌ H2(g) 0,00
S + 2H + 2e
+
⇌ H2S(g) + 0,14
4+  2+
Sn + 2e ⇌ Sn + 0,15
+ e
2+ +
Cu ⇌ Cu + 0,16
2
+ 4H + 2e ⇌
+
SO 4 SO2(g) + 2H2O + 0,17
+ 2e
2+
Cu ⇌ Cu + 0,34
 
2H2O + O2 + 4e ⇌ 4OH + 0,40
SO2 + 4H + 4e
+
⇌ S + 2H2O + 0,45
+ 
Cu + e ⇌ Cu + 0,52
I2 + 2e ⇌ 2I + 0,54
+ 
O2(g) + 2H + 2e ⇌ H2O2 + 0,68
+ e
3+ 2+
Fe ⇌ Fe + 0,77
 + 
NO 3 + 2H + e ⇌ NO2(g) + H2O + 0,80
+ 
Ag + e ⇌ Ag + 0,80
2+ 
Hg + 2e ⇌ Hg(ℓ) + 0,85
 + 
NO 3 + 4H + 3e ⇌ NO(g) + 2H2O + 0,96
 
Br2(ℓ) + 2e ⇌ 2Br + 1,07
+ 2 e
2+
Pt ⇌ Pt + 1,20
+  2+
MnO2 + 4H + 2e ⇌ Mn + 2H2O + 1,23
O2(g) + 4H + 4e
+
⇌ 2H2O + 1,23
2 3+
+ 14H + 6e ⇌
+
Cr2O 7 2Cr + 7H2O + 1,33
 
Cℓ2(g) + 2e ⇌ 2Cℓ + 1,36

+ 8H + 5e
2+

+
MnO 4 Mn + 4H2O + 1,51
H2O2 + 2H +2 e
+
⇌ 2H2O +1,77
+ e
3+ 2+
Co ⇌ Co + 1,81
F2(g) + 2e ⇌ 2F + 2,87

Copyright reserved
SENIOR CERTIFICATE EXAMINATIONS

PHYSICAL SCIENCES: CHEMISTRY (P2)

2016

MARKS: 150

TIME: 3 hours

This question paper consists of 15 pages and 4 data sheets.

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 3 DBE/2016
SCE

QUESTION 1: MULTIPLE-CHOICE QUESTIONS

Four options are provided as possible answers to the following questions.


Each question has only ONE correct answer. Choose the answer and write only the
letter (A–D) next to the question number (1.1–1.10) in the ANSWER BOOK, for
example 1.11 E.

1.1 A compound with the general formula C n H 2n+2 is an ...

A alkane.

B alkene.

C alkyne.

D alcohol. (2)

1.2 Which ONE of the following is a product in ALL neutralisation reactions?

A H+

B H2O

C OH−

D NaCℓ (2)

1.3 Which ONE of the following pairs of products is formed during the catalytic
oxidation of ammonia?

A NO 2 and H 2 O

B NO and H 2 O

C NO and NO 2

D H 2 O and HNO 3 (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 4 DBE/2016
SCE

1.4 Consider the following potential energy diagram for a chemical reaction:

120

Potential energy 100


80
(kJ∙mol-1)

60

40
20
0
Course of reaction

Which ONE of the following shows the values of the total energy change and
the activation energy for this reaction?

Energy change Activation energy


(kJ∙mol-1) (kJ∙mol-1)
A 80 40
B 60 100
C 40 80
D – 40 80 (2)

1.5 Which ONE of the following is a functional isomer of butanoic acid?

O O

A H O C CH CH3 B CH3 C O CH2 CH3

CH3
H H H O H

C H C C C C O H D H C C CH2 CH3

H H H H O
(2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 5 DBE/2016
SCE

1.6 In the flow diagram below P and Q represent two organic compounds.

HBr NaOH(aq)
CH2 CH2 P heat Q (major product)

Compound Q is:

A CH 2 CH 2

B CH 3 CH 3

C CH 3 CH 2 Br

D CH 3 CH 2 OH (2)

1.7 Chromate ions and dichromate ions are in equilibrium with each other in an
aqueous solution according to the following balanced equation:

2CrO 24− (aq) + 2 H + (aq) ⇌ Cr2 O 72− (aq) + H2 O (ℓ)


yellow orange

Which ONE of the following reagents should be added to change the colour of
the solution to yellow?

A HNO 3

B HCℓ

C NaOH

D CH 3 COOH (2)

1.8 Which ONE of the following is a NON-SPONTANEOUS redox reaction? Refer


to the Table of Standard Reduction Potentials (Table 4A or 4B).

A Zn(s) + 2HCℓ(aq) → ZnCℓ 2 (aq) + H 2 (g)

B Cu(s) + FeCℓ 2 (aq) → CuCℓ 2 (aq) + Fe(s)

C 2AgNO 3 (aq) + Cu(s) → Cu(NO 3 ) 2 (aq) + 2Ag(s)

D 2Aℓ(s) + 3Ni(NO 3 ) 2 (aq) → 2Aℓ(NO 3 ) 3 (aq) + 3Ni(s) (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 6 DBE/2016
SCE

1.9 In the electrochemical cell below the letters X and Y represent two metal
electrodes.

Electrode X Electrode Y

When the cell is functioning, ELECTRODE X GAINS MASS.

Which ONE of the following is the CORRECT cell notation for this cell?

A Y(s) | Y2+(aq) || X+(aq) | X(s)

B X(s) | X+(aq) || Y2+(aq) | Y(s)

C X+(aq) | X(s) || Y(s) | Y2+(aq)

D Y2+(aq) | Y(s) || X(s) | X+(aq) (2)

1.10 Graph Q (the solid line) below was obtained for the reaction of 100 cm3 of a
0,1 mol∙dm-3 HCℓ solution with excess magnesium powder.

Which graph (A, B, C or D) most probably represents the reaction of 100 cm3
of a 0,1 mol∙dm-3 CH 3 COOH solution with excess magnesium powder?

A
produced (cm3)
Volume H2 gas

B
Q
C D

Time (s)

(2)
[20]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 7 DBE/2016
SCE

QUESTION 2 (Start on a new page.)

Consider the organic compounds A to F below.

H H
CH3 H
A C C B H C C C C H
CH3 CH3
H CH3

C CH 3 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OH D 2,2-dimethylpropane

H O H H

E H C O C C C H F CH 3 CHC(CH 3 ) 2

H H H

2.1 Write down the LETTER that represents a compound that:

2.1.1 Has a carbonyl group (1)

2.1.2 Is an alcohol (1)

2.1.3 Is a CHAIN ISOMER of CH 3 (CH 2 ) 3 CH 3 (1)

2.2 Write down the:

2.2.1 IUPAC name of compound B (2)

2.2.2 Structural formula of compound F (2)

2.2.3 IUPAC name of a POSITIONAL isomer of compound A (3)

2.3 Compound E is formed when a carboxylic acid reacts with another


organic compound.

Write down the:

2.3.1 Homologous series to which compound E belongs (1)

2.3.2 NAME or FORMULA of the catalyst used for the preparation of


compound E (1)

2.3.3 IUPAC name of compound E (2)


[14]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 8 DBE/2016
SCE

QUESTION 3 (Start on a new page.)

The relationship between boiling point and the number of carbon atoms in straight
chain molecules of alkanes, carboxylic acids and alcohols is investigated. Curves P, Q
and R are obtained.

GRAPH OF BOILING POINT VERSUS NUMBER OF C ATOMS

500 Curve R

Curve Q
400
Boiling point (K)

Curve P

300

200

100
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Number of C atoms
3.1 Define the term boiling point. (2)

3.2 For curve P, write down a conclusion that can be drawn from the above
results. (2)

3.3 Identify the curve (P, Q or R) that represents each of the following:

3.3.1 Alkanes (1)

3.3.2 Carboxylic acids (1)

3.4 Explain the answer to QUESTION 3.3.2 by referring to the:

• Types of intermolecular forces present in alkanes, carboxylic acids and


alcohols
• Relative strengths of these intermolecular forces
• Energy needed (5)
[11]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 9 DBE/2016
SCE

QUESTION 4 (Start on a new page.)

The flow diagram below shows how prop-1-ene can be used to prepare other organic
compounds.

propane

D C alcohol
compound X prop-1-ene
(major product) (major product)
HBr B

4.1 Write down the type of reaction represented by:

4.1.1 A (1)

4.1.2 D (1)

4.1.3 F (1)

4.2 Write down the:

4.2.1 NAME or FORMULA of the catalyst needed for reaction A (1)

4.2.2 NAME or FORMULA of the inorganic reagent needed for


reaction B (1)

4.2.3 Type of addition reaction represented by reaction C (1)

4.2.4 IUPAC name of compound X (2)

4.3 Use structural formulae to write down a balanced equation for reaction B. (5)

4.4 Both reactions D and E take place in the presence of a strong base.
State TWO conditions that will favour reaction D over reaction E. (2)
[15]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 10 DBE/2016
SCE

QUESTION 5 (Start on a new page.)

The reaction between dilute hydrochloric acid and sodium thiosulphate (Na 2 S 2 O 3 ) is
used to investigate one of the factors that influences reaction rate. The balanced
equation for the reaction is:

Na 2 S 2 O 3 (aq) + 2HCℓ(aq) → 2NaCℓ(aq) + S(s) + H 2 O(ℓ) + SO 2 (g)

The hydrochloric acid solution is added to the sodium thiosulphate solution in a flask.
The flask is placed over a cross drawn on a sheet of white paper, as shown in the
diagram below. The time that it takes for the cross to become invisible is measured to
determine the reaction rate.

flask

Na2S2O3(aq) + HCℓ(aq)

white paper

Four experiments, A to D, are conducted during this investigation. The volumes of


reactants used in each of the four experiments and the times of the reactions are
summarised in the table below.

Volume of
Volume of Volume of
Experiment Na 2 S 2 O 3 (aq) Time (s)
H 2 O(ℓ) (cm3) HCℓ(aq) (cm3)
(cm3)
A 25 0 5 50,0
B 20 5 5 62,5
C 15 10 5 83,3
D 10 15 5 125,0

5.1 State TWO factors that can influence the rate of the reaction above. (2)

5.2 Write down the NAME or FORMULA of the product that causes the cross to
become invisible. (1)

5.3 Give a reason why water is added to the reaction mixture in experiments B
to D. (1)

5.4 Write down an investigative question for this investigation. (2)

5.5 In which experiment (A, B, C or D) is the reaction rate the highest? (1)

5.6 Use the collision theory to explain the difference in reaction rate between
experiments B and D. (3)

5.7 The original Na 2 S 2 O 3 solution was prepared by dissolving 62,50 g Na 2 S 2 O 3


crystals in distilled water in a 250 cm3 volumetric flask.
Calculate the mass of sulphur, S, that will form in experiment D if Na 2 S 2 O 3 is
the limiting reactant. (7)
[17]
Copyright reserved Please turn over
Physical Sciences/P2 11 DBE/2016
SCE

QUESTION 6 (Start on a new page.)

Carbon dioxide reacts with carbon in a closed system to produce carbon monoxide,
CO(g), according to the following balanced equation:

CO 2 (g) + C(s) ⇌ 2CO(g) ΔH > 0

6.1 What does the double arrow indicate in the equation above? (1)

6.2 Is the above reaction an EXOTHERMIC reaction or an ENDOTHERMIC


reaction? Give a reason for the answer. (2)

Initially an unknown amount of carbon dioxide is exposed to hot carbon at 800 °C in a


sealed 2 dm3 container. The equilibrium constant, K c , for the reaction at this
temperature is 14.

At equilibrium it is found that 168,00 g carbon monoxide is present.

6.3 How will the equilibrium concentration of the product compare to that of the
reactants? Choose from LARGER THAN, SMALLER THAN or EQUAL TO.

Give a reason for the answer. (No calculation is required.) (2)

6.4 Calculate the initial amount (in moles) of CO 2 (g) present. (9)

6.5 State how EACH of the following will affect the yield of CO(g) at equilibrium.
Choose from INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME.

6.5.1 More carbon is added at constant temperature. (1)

6.5.2 The pressure is increased. (1)

6.5.3 The temperature is increased. (1)


[17]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 12 DBE/2016
SCE

QUESTION 7 (Start on a new page.)

7.1 Hydrogen carbonate ions react with water according to the following balanced
equation:

HCO3− (aq) + H 2 O(ℓ) ⇌ H 2 CO 3 (aq) + OH− (aq)

7.1.1 Define an acid according to the Lowry-Brønsted theory. (2)

7.1.2 Write down the FORMULAE of the two acids in the equation
above. (2)

7.1.3 Write down the formula of a substance in the reaction above that
can act as an ampholyte. (1)

7.2 During an experiment 0,50 dm3 of a 0,10 mol∙dm-3 HCℓ solution is added to
0,80 dm3 of a NaHCO 3 solution of concentration 0,25 mol∙dm-3. The balanced
equation for the reaction is:

NaHCO 3 (aq) + HCℓ(aq) → NaCℓ(aq) + CO 2 (g) + H 2 O(ℓ)

Calculate the:

7.2.1 Concentration of the hydroxide ions in the solution on completion of


the reaction (8)

7.2.2 pH of the solution on completion of the reaction (4)


[17]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 13 DBE/2016
SCE

QUESTION 8 (Start on a new page.)

Magnesium (Mg) reacts with a dilute hydrochloric acid solution, HCℓ(aq), according to
the following balanced equation:

Mg(s) + 2HCℓ(aq) → MgCℓ 2 (aq) + H 2 (g)

8.1 Give a reason why the reaction above is a redox reaction. (1)

8.2 Write down the FORMULA of the oxidising agent in the reaction above. (1)

It is found that silver does not react with the hydrochloric acid solution.

8.3 Refer to the relative strengths of reducing agents to explain this observation. (3)

The reaction of magnesium with hydrochloric acid is used in an electrochemical cell, as


shown in the diagram below. The cell functions under standard conditions.

hydrogen gas Q
Mg

platinum
1 mol·dm-3 H+(aq) Mg2+ (aq)

half-cell A half-cell B

8.4 What is the function of platinum in the cell above? (1)

8.5 Write down the:

8.5.1 Energy conversion that takes place in this cell (1)

8.5.2 Function of Q (1)

8.5.3 Half-reaction that takes place at the cathode (2)

8.5.4 Cell notation of this cell (3)

8.6 Calculate the initial emf of this cell. (4)

8.7 How will the addition of concentrated acid to half-cell A influence the answer
to QUESTION 8.6? Choose from INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS
THE SAME. (1)
[18]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 14 DBE/2016
SCE

QUESTION 9 (Start on a new page.)

The diagram below shows an electrochemical cell used to purify copper. A solution that
conducts electricity is used in the cell.

A B

9.1 Write down:

9.1.1 ONE word for the underlined phrase above the diagram (1)

9.1.2 The type of electrochemical cell illustrated above (1)

9.2 In which direction (from A to B or from B to A) will electrons flow in the


external circuit? (1)

9.3 Which electrode (A or B) is the:

9.3.1 Cathode (1)

9.3.2 Impure copper (1)

9.4 How will the mass of electrode A change as the reaction proceeds? Choose
from INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME.

Give a reason for the answer. (2)


[7]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 15 DBE/2016
SCE

QUESTION 10 (Start on a new page.)

A chemical company produces ammonium sulphate, (NH 4 ) 2 SO 4 , starting from the raw
materials P, Q and R, as shown in the flow diagram below.

P Q R

SO2(g)

nitrogen hydrogen
SO3(g)

reaction 1
process 1
oleum

compound X compound Y

(NH4)2SO4

10.1 Write down the NAME of raw material:

10.1.1 P (1)

10.1.2 Q (1)

10.1.3 R (1)

10.2 Write down the:

10.2.1 NAME of process 1 (1)

10.2.2 NAME of compound X (1)

10.2.3 FORMULA of compound Y (1)

10.2.4 Balanced equation for reaction 1 (3)

10.3 The company compares the nitrogen content of ammonium sulphate with that
of ammonium nitrate, NH 4 NO 3 .

10.3.1 Determine, by performing the necessary calculations, which ONE of


the two fertilisers has the higher percentage of nitrogen per mass. (4)

10.3.2 Write down the name of the process that should be included in the
flow diagram above if the company wants to prepare ammonium
nitrate instead of ammonium sulphate. (1)
[14]

TOTAL: 150
Copyright reserved
SENIOR CERTIFICATE EXAMINATIONS

PHYSICAL SCIENCES: CHEMISTRY (P2)

2017

MARKS: 150

TIME: 3 hours

This question paper consists of 15 pages and 4 data sheets.

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 3 DBE/2017
SCE

QUESTION 1: MULTIPLE-CHOICE QUESTIONS

Various options are provided as possible answers to the following questions. Write
down the question number (1.1–1.10), choose the answer and make a cross (X) over
the letter (A–D) of your choice in the ANSWER BOOK.

EXAMPLE:

1.11 A B C D

1.1 The boiling point of a compound is the …

A minimum temperature at which it boils.

B average temperature at which it boils across all possible atmospheric


pressures.

C maximum temperature at which it boils.

D temperature at which its vapour pressure equals atmospheric pressure. (2)

1.2 Which ONE of the following organic reactions will take place only when
exposed to light?

A CH 2 CH 2 + H 2 → CH 3 CH 3

B CH 3 CH 3 → CH 2 CH 2 + H 2

C CH 2 CH 2 + Cℓ 2 → CH 2 CℓCH 2 Cℓ

D CH 3 CH 3 + Cℓ 2 → CH 3 CH 2 Cℓ + HCℓ (2)

1.3 The energy change during a chemical reaction is known as …

A bond energy.

B heat of reaction.

C activation energy.

D activated complex. (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 4 DBE/2017
SCE

1.4 Which ONE of the descriptions below is TRUE for a chemical reaction in
equilibrium?

CONCENTRATIONS OF FORWARD AND REVERSE


REACTANTS AND PRODUCTS REACTION RATES
A Remain constant Equal
B Remain constant Not equal
C Equal Equal
D Not equal Not equal (2)

1.5 The complete combustion of ethane is represented by the balanced equation


below.
2C 2 H 6 (g) + 7O 2 (g) → 4CO 2 (g) + 6H 2 O(g)

The maximum volume of gas that can be produced by the complete


combustion of 100 cm3 of ethane is:

A 200 cm3

B 400 cm3

C 500 cm3

D 600 cm3 (2)

1.6 The reaction below reaches equilibrium in a closed container.

N 2 (g) + 3H 2 (g) ⇌ 2NH 3 (g) + energy

Consider the following statements regarding the equilibrium above:


I: When one N 2 molecule combines with three H 2 molecules, two
NH 3 molecules decompose at the same time.
II: An iron oxide catalyst increases the amount of ammonia produced in this
reaction.
III: When the temperature increases, the equilibrium constant (K c ) for this
reaction will increase.

Which of the above statements is/are CORRECT?

A I only

B I and II only

C I and III only

D I, II and III (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 5 DBE/2017
SCE

1.7 Which ONE of the following pairs represents the conjugate acid and the
conjugate base of HPO 24− ?

CONJUGATE ACID CONJUGATE BASE


A PO 34− H2PO −4
B H2PO −4 PO 34−
C H2PO −4 H 3 PO 4
D H2PO 24− PO 24− (2)

1.8 A simplified diagram for the extraction of aluminium is shown below.

CO2(g)

Graphite electrode Electrolyte


Molten aluminium

Consider the following statements regarding the process above:

I: The electrolyte is a mixture of cryolite and aluminium oxide.

II: O 2 (g) is produced at the anode.

III: The half-reaction at the cathode is Aℓ3+(aq) + 3e- → Aℓ(s).

Which of the above statements are CORRECT?

A I and II only

B II and III only

C I and III only

D I, II and III (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 6 DBE/2017
SCE

1.9 Which ONE of the half-cells below will result in the HIGHEST emf when it is
used as a cathode, together with a zinc half-cell as anode, in a standard
galvanic cell?

A Cu2+(aq) | Cu(s)

B Fe2+(aq) | Fe(s)

C Ag+(aq) | Ag(s)

D Sn2+(aq) | Sn(s) (2)

1.10 Which of the following processes are ALL involved in the preparation of
ammonium sulphate?

A Ostwald process Contact process Haber process

B Fractional distillation
Ostwald process Contact process
of liquid air
C Fractional distillation
Haber process Contact process
of liquid air
D Fractional distillation
Haber process Ostwald process
of liquid air (2)
[20]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 7 DBE/2017
SCE

QUESTION 2 (Start on a new page.)

2.1 Define the term functional group of organic compounds. (2)

2.2 Write down the:

2.2.1 Structural formula of the functional group of aldehydes (1)

2.2.2 Name of the functional group of carboxylic acids (1)

2.3 The IUPAC name of an organic compound is 2,4-dimethylhexan-3-one.

For this compound, write down the:

2.3.1 Homologous series to which it belongs (1)

2.3.2 Structural formula (3)

2.4 Write down the IUPAC names of the following compounds:

2.4.1 H
H C H
H

H C HH C H
H H H H

H C C C C C C H

H H H Br H
H C H

H (3)

2.4.2 H H H

H C C C C C H

H H
H C H

H (2)
[13]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 8 DBE/2017
SCE

QUESTION 3 (Start on a new page.)

The boiling points of some organic compounds are given in the table below.
Y represents an unknown boiling point.

BOILING POINT
COMPOUND
(°C)
A Methanol 64,7
B Ethanol 78,3
C Propan-1-ol 97,2
D Butan-1-ol 117,7
E Butan-2-ol 99,5
F 2-methylpropan-1-ol Y
G 2-methylpropan-2-ol 82,5

3.1 For the compounds listed above, write down the:

3.1.1 Structural formula of compound F (3)

3.1.2 LETTER that represents a POSITIONAL isomer of compound E (1)

3.1.3 LETTER that represents a CHAIN isomer of compound E (1)

3.2 The boiling points increase from compound A to compound D.

3.2.1 Give a reason for this increase in terms of the molecular structure. (1)

3.2.2 Name the intermolecular force in these compounds responsible for


this increase. (1)

3.3 Consider the boiling points given below.

85 °C 108 °C 122 °C

3.3.1 From these boiling points, choose the boiling point represented by
Y in the table above. (1)

3.3.2 Fully explain how you arrived at the answer to QUESTION 3.3.1. (4)

3.4 Hydrogen bonding is responsible for the relatively high boiling points of
compounds A to G in comparison with hydrocarbons of similar molecular size.

Draw TWO structural formulae of compound A. Use a dotted line to show the
hydrogen bonding between the two structural formulae. (2)

3.5 Compound B reacts with propanoic acid in the presence of concentrated


sulphuric acid.

Write down the:

3.5.1 Type of reaction that takes place (1)

3.5.2 Structural formula of the organic product formed (2)


[17]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 9 DBE/2017
SCE

QUESTION 4 (Start on a new page.)

The flow diagram below shows how an alkene can be used to prepare other organic
compounds. The letters A to G represent different organic reactions.

Compound Y

B HCℓ C G

H H
E
A An alcohol
Propane C C C H (major product)
H2O
H H H

D HBr
F

Compound X
(major product)

4.1 Write down the type of reaction represented by:

4.1.1 A (1)

4.1.2 B (1)

4.1.3 E (1)

4.2 Write down the IUPAC name of compound X. (2)

4.3 For reaction D, write down:

4.3.1 The type of elimination reaction (1)

4.3.2 TWO reaction conditions (2)

4.4 Write down the:

4.4.1 FORMULA of an inorganic reactant needed for reaction F (1)

4.4.2 Balanced equation, using structural formulae, for reaction G (4)


[13]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 10 DBE/2017
SCE

QUESTION 5 (Start on a new page.)

The apparatus below is used to investigate one of the factors that affects the rate of
decomposition of hydrogen peroxide, H 2 O 2 . The balanced equation for the reaction is:

2H 2 O 2 (aq) → 2H 2 O(ℓ) + O 2 (g)

Two experiments are conducted. The reaction conditions are as follows:

Experiment I: 50 cm3 of hydrogen peroxide is allowed to decompose at 30 °C.

Experiment II: 50 cm3 of hydrogen peroxide decompose at 30 °C in the presence of


copper(II) oxide powder (CuO).

Graduated syringe Graduated syringe

Conical flask

H2O2(aq)
CuO(s)

Experiment I Experiment II

The results of the investigation are summarised in the table below.

Total volume of O 2 Time taken for complete


Experiment
produced (dm3) decomposition (min.)
I 0,4 12,3
II 0,4 5,8

5.1 For this investigation, write down the function of the:

5.1.1 Graduated syringe (1)

5.1.2 Copper(II) oxide (1)

5.2 How will you know when the reaction is completed? (1)

5.3 Write down the independent variable for this investigation. (1)

5.4 Use the collision theory to fully explain the difference in reaction rates of
experiment I and experiment II. (3)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 11 DBE/2017
SCE

5.5 The graphs below show changes in the potential energy during the
decomposition of hydrogen peroxide in experiment I and experiment II.

A
B
Potential energy (kJ)

H2O2

H2O+ O2

Course of reaction

5.5.1 Is energy ABSORBED or RELEASED during this reaction? Give a


reason for the answer. (2)

5.5.2 Which ONE of the curves, A or B, represents experiment II? (1)

5.6 Calculate the rate, in mol∙dm-3∙min-1, at which 50 cm3 of hydrogen peroxide


decomposes in experiment II. Assume that 1 mole of gas occupies a volume
of 25 dm3 at 30 °C. (6)
[16]
QUESTION 6 (Start on a new page.)

6.1 Consider the balanced equation for a reversible reaction below.

N 2 (g) + O 2 (g) ⇌ 2NO(g)

6.1.1 What is meant by the term reversible reaction? (1)

The sketch graph below shows the relationship between the value of the
equilibrium constant (K c ) for this reaction and temperature.

Kc

Temperature

6.1.2 Is the reaction ENDOTHERMIC or EXOTHERMIC? (1)

6.1.3 Fully explain the answer to QUESTION 6.1.2. (3)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 12 DBE/2017
SCE

How will EACH of the following changes affect the amount of NO(g) at
equilibrium?
Choose from INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME.
6.1.4 More N 2 (g) is added. (1)
6.1.5 The pressure is increased by decreasing the volume. (1)

6.2 Initially 336 g titanium (Ti) and 426 g chlorine gas (Cℓ 2 ) are mixed in a sealed
2 dm3 container at a certain temperature. The reaction reaches equilibrium
according to the following balanced equation:
Ti(s) + 2Cℓ 2 (g) ⇌ TiCℓ 4 (s)
At equilibrium it is found that 288 g titanium is left in the container.
6.2.1 Calculate the equilibrium constant (K c ) for the reaction at this
temperature. (8)
6.2.2 More titanium is now added to the equilibrium mixture. How will this
change affect the yield of TiCℓ 4 (s)?

Choose from INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME. (1)


[16]
QUESTION 7 (Start on a new page.)
7.1 Ethanoic acid (CH 3 COOH) is an acid that ionises incompletely in water
according to the following balanced equation:
CH 3 COOH(aq) + H 2 O(ℓ) → CH 3 COO─(aq) + H 3 O+(aq)
7.1.1 Write down the term used for the underlined phrase above. (1)
7.1.2 An ethanoic acid solution has a pH of 4 at 25 °C. Calculate the
concentration of the hydronium ions, H 3 O+(aq) in the solution. (3)

7.2 A standard solution of potassium hydroxide (KOH) is prepared in a 250 cm3


volumetric flask. During a titration, 12,5 cm3 of this solution neutralises 25 cm3
of a 0,16 mol∙dm-3 ethanoic acid solution.
The balanced equation for the reaction is:
CH 3 COOH(aq) + KOH(aq) → CH 3 COOK(aq) + H 2 O(ℓ)
7.2.1 Define a base according to the Arrhenius theory. (2)
7.2.2 Calculate the mass of potassium hydroxide used to prepare the
solution above in the 250 cm3 volumetric flask. (7)
7.2.3 Will the pH of the solution in the conical flask at the end point be
GREATER THAN 7, SMALLER THAN 7 or EQUAL TO 7? (1)
7.2.4 Explain the answer to QUESTION 7.2.3 with the aid of a balanced
chemical equation. (3)
[17]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 13 DBE/2017
SCE

QUESTION 8 (Start on a new page.)

The electrochemical cell represented by the cell notation below is used to investigate
the relationship between the concentration of X2+(aq) and the emf of the cell. The
concentration of Zn2+(aq) and the temperature are kept at standard conditions.

Zn(s) | Zn2+(aq) || X2+(aq) | X(s)

The graph below shows the results obtained.

Graph of emf versus [X2+]

1,11
1,09
emf (V)

1,08

1,07

0,1 0,2 0,6 1,0


2+ -3
[X ] (mol∙dm )

8.1 For this investigation, write down the:

8.1.1 Dependent variable (1)

8.1.2 Name of an instrument needed to measure the emf of the cell (1)

8.1.3 Name of the component of the cell that ensures electrical neutrality (1)

8.1.4 Values of TWO standard conditions needed to ensure that the


standard emf is obtained (2)

8.2 Write down the conclusion that can be drawn from the results. (2)

8.3 Identify electrode X with the aid of a calculation. (5)

8.4 Write down the overall (net) cell reaction that takes place when this cell is in
operation. (3)
[15]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 14 DBE/2017
SCE

QUESTION 9 (Start on a new page.)

The simplified diagram below represents a cell used to electroplate an iron medal with
a thin layer of gold.

battery

Medal
AuCℓ3(aq)

9.1 Is this an ELECTROLYTIC or a GALVANIC cell? (1)

9.2 Which electrode, P or the Medal, is the anode? (1)

9.3 Write down the:

9.3.1 Half-reaction that takes place at electrode P (2)

9.3.2 Oxidation number of gold (Au) in the electrolyte (1)

9.3.3 Energy change that takes place in this cell (1)

9.3.4 Visible change that occurs on electrode P after the cell functions
for a while (1)

9.4 Besides improving appearance, state ONE other reason why the medal is
electroplated. (1)

9.5 State ONE of the two possible changes that should be made to the cell above
to electroplate the medal with silver instead of gold. (1)
[9]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 15 DBE/2017
SCE

QUESTION 10 (Start on a new page.)

10.1 The letters A to F in the table below represent some fertilisers and raw
materials used in the preparation of fertilisers.

A Sulphur B Air

C Methane D Potassium chloride

E Ammonium sulphate F Ammonium nitrate

Write down the:

10.1.1 LETTERS representing TWO raw materials used in the preparation


of compound F (2)

10.1.2 NAME or FORMULA of the acid needed to prepare compound F (1)

10.1.3 LETTER representing the solid raw material used in the contact
process (1)

10.1.4 Balanced equation for the preparation of compound E (3)

10.1.5 LETTER representing the raw material that supplies the primary
nutrient needed for development of flowers (1)

10.2 A 2 kg bag of fertiliser is labelled as follows:

2 : 3 : 2 (22)

Calculate the mass of the:

10.2.1 Phosphorous in the bag (3)

10.2.2 Filler in the bag (3)


[14]

TOTAL: 150

Copyright reserved
SENIOR CERTIFICATE EXAMINATIONS

PHYSICAL SCIENCES: CHEMISTRY (P2)

2018

MARKS: 150

TIME: 3 hours

This question paper consists of 16 pages and 4 data sheets.

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 3 DBE/2018
SCE

QUESTION 1: MULTIPLE-CHOICE QUESTIONS

Various options are provided as possible answers to the following questions.


Choose the answer and write down only the letter (A–D) next to the question numbers
(1.1 to 1.10) in the ANSWER BOOK, e.g. 1.11 D.

1.1 An example of a saturated organic compound is …

A ethyne.

B propene.

C but-2-ene.

D 2-chloropropane. (2)

1.2 When ethene reacts with hydrogen gas in the presence of a catalyst,
the product is …

A ethane.

B ethyne.

C ethanol.

D ethanal. (2)

1.3 Study the structural formula of the functional group below.


O

C C C

The structure above is the functional group of …

A esters.

B ketones.

C aldehydes.

D carboxylic acids. (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 4 DBE/2018
SCE

1.4 The potential energy graph for a hypothetical chemical reaction is shown
below.

Potential energy (kJ∙mol-1)


c

products
b

a reactants

Course of reaction

What type of reaction is taking place and what are the correct methods to
calculate H and E a ?

TYPE OF
H Ea
REACTION
A Exothermic b−a c−b
B Endothermic b−a c−a
C Endothermic a−b a−c
D Exothermic a−b b−c (2)

1.5 Study the hypothetical reaction below:

2P(g) + 3Q(g) → 4R(g) + 2Z(g)

The rate of the reaction in terms of the number of moles of substance P used
up, is 1 x 10-3 mol∙dm-3∙s-1. What is the rate (in mol∙dm-3∙s-1) at which
product R is formed?

A 1× 10 −3
B 4(1 × 10 −3 )

C 1× 10 −3
2
D 2(1× 10 −3 ) (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 5 DBE/2018
SCE

1.6 Study the following reaction at equilibrium at a certain temperature.

2SO 3 (g) ⇌ O 2 (g) + 2SO 2 (g) H > 0

Which ONE of the following factors will change the K c value?

A Adding more SO 2 (g).

B Adding a catalyst.

C Increasing the temperature.

D Increasing the pressure by decreasing the volume. (2)

1.7 Which ONE of the following represents the products formed during the
hydrolysis of NH +4 (aq)?

A NH 3 (aq) + H 2 O(ℓ)

B NH 3 (aq) + H 3 O+(aq)

C NH 3 (aq) + OH–(aq)

D NH 3 (aq) + OH–(aq) + H 2 O(ℓ) (2)

1.8 Potassium nitrate is used as an electrolyte in the salt bridge of a copper-zinc


cell.

Which ONE of the following CORRECTLY shows the direction of migration of


potassium and nitrate ions in the cell?

POTASSIUM IONS NITRATE IONS


TO THE: TO THE:
A Anode Cathode
B Negative electrode Positive electrode
C Zinc electrode Copper electrode
D Copper electrode Zinc electrode (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 6 DBE/2018
SCE

1.9 Which ONE of the following shows the electrode where the electrons are
gained in an electrolytic cell and the chemical change that occurs at this
electrode?

ELECTRODE WHERE
CHEMICAL CHANGE
ELECTRONS ARE GAINED
A Anode Oxidation
B Anode Reduction
C Cathode Oxidation
D Cathode Reduction (2)

1.10 The industrial preparation of nitric acid is known as the …

A Haber process.

B contact process.

C Ostwald process.

D catalytic oxidation of ammonia. (2)


[20]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 7 DBE/2018
SCE

QUESTION 2 (Start on a new page.)

Next to each letter, A to F, in the table below is the molecular formula of an organic
compound.

A C 2 H 5 Br B C2H4

C C 4 H 10 D C2H6O

E C3H6O F C3H6O2

2.1 Choose a molecular formula above that represents an organic compound


below. Write down only the letter (A to F) next to the question numbers
(2.1.1 to 2.1.5), e.g. 2.1.6 G.

2.1.1 A haloalkane (1)

2.1.2 An alcohol (1)

2.1.3 An unsaturated hydrocarbon (1)

2.1.4 An aldehyde (1)

2.1.5 A product of thermal cracking of compound C (1)

2.2 If compound F is a carboxylic acid, write down the following:

2.2.1 The structural formula of a FUNCTIONAL isomer of F (2)

2.2.2 The IUPAC name of a FUNCTIONAL isomer of F (2)

2.3 Compound B is a monomer used to make a polymer.

Write down the:

2.3.1 Definition of a polymer (2)

2.3.2 IUPAC name of the polymer (1)

2.3.3 Balanced equation for the polymerisation reaction (3)

2.4 Compound A is used as a reactant in the production of compound D.


Name the type of reaction that takes place. (1)

2.5 State TWO changes that can be made to the reaction conditions in
QUESTION 2.4 to obtain compound B, instead of D, as product. (2)
[18]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 8 DBE/2018
SCE

QUESTION 3 (Start on a new page.)

The boiling points of straight-chain alkanes and straight-chain alcohols are compared
in the table below.

NUMBER OF BOILING POINTS BOILING POINTS OF


CARBON ATOMS OF ALKANES (°C) ALCOHOLS (°C)
1 - 162 64
2 - 89 78
3 - 42 98
4 - 0,5 118

3.1 Explain the increase in boiling points of the alkanes, as indicated in the table. (3)

3.2 Explain the difference between the boiling points of an alkane and an alcohol,
each having THREE carbon atoms per molecule, by referring to the TYPE of
intermolecular forces. (4)

3.3 Does the vapour pressure of the alcohols INCREASE or DECREASE with an
increase in the number of carbon atoms? (1)

3.4 How will the boiling point of 2-methylpropane compare to that of its chain
isomer?

Write down HIGHER THAN, LOWER THAN or EQUAL TO. Give a reason for
the answer by referring to the structural differences between the two
compounds. (2)
[10]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 9 DBE/2018
SCE

QUESTION 4 (Start on a new page.)

Propan-1-ol can undergo a number of organic reactions, as indicated by the letters A


to D in the diagram below.

CH3CHCH2
Reaction D
Reaction B

Reaction C Reaction A
CH3CH2CH2OOCCH3 Propan-1-ol CH3CH2CH2Br
H2SO4

4.1 Write down the type of reaction represented by:

4.1.1 A (1)

4.1.2 B (1)

4.1.3 C (1)

4.1.4 D (1)

4.2 For reaction C, write down the:

4.2.1 Function of H 2 SO 4 (1)

4.2.2 IUPAC name of the organic product (2)

4.2.3 Structural formula of the other organic reactant (2)

4.3 Use STRUCTURAL FORMULAE for all organic reactants and products to
write a balanced equation for reaction A. (5)
[14]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 10 DBE/2018
SCE

QUESTION 5 (Start on a new page.)

Two experiments are carried out to investigate one of the factors that affects the
reaction rate between magnesium and dilute hydrochloric acid. The balanced equation
below represents the reaction that takes place.

Mg(s) + 2HCℓ(aq) → MgCℓ 2 (aq) + H 2 (g)

In experiment 1 a certain mass of magnesium ribbon reacts with excess dilute


hydrochloric acid. In experiment 2 magnesium powder of the same mass as the
magnesium ribbon, reacts with the same volume of excess dilute hydrochloric acid.
The concentration of the acid is the same in both experiments.

The apparatus below is used for the investigation.

Cotton wool plug

Dilute hydrochloric acid Gas bubbles

Magnesium

Balance

5.1 Define reaction rate. (2)

5.2 For this investigation, write down the:

5.2.1 Independent variable (1)

5.2.2 Control variable (1)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 11 DBE/2018
SCE

The change in mass of magnesium is calculated and recorded in 2-minute intervals for
both experiments. The results obtained are shown in the graph below (NOT drawn
to scale).

Mass of magnesium (g)

2,6 Exp. 1

Exp. 2

0,2

0
2 10 16
Time (minutes)

5.3 Use the information on the graph to:

5.3.1 Calculate the volume of hydrogen gas produced in experiment 1


from t = 2 minutes to t = 10 minutes

Take the molar gas volume as 25 dm3∙mol-1. (5)

5.3.2 Calculate the initial mass of magnesium used if the average rate of
formation of hydrogen gas in experiment 2 was 2,08 x 10-4 mol∙s-1 (5)

5.4 Use the collision theory to explain why the curve of experiment 2 is steeper
than that of experiment 1. (3)
[17]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 12 DBE/2018
SCE

QUESTION 6 (Start on a new page.)


The equation below represents a hypothetical reaction that reaches equilibrium in a
closed container after 2 minutes at room temperature. The letters x, y and z represent
the number of moles in the balanced equation.
xA(aq) + yB(aq) ⇌ zC(aq)
The graph below shows the change in the number of moles of reactants and products
versus time during the reaction.
Graph of number of moles of reactants and products versus time

16
Number of reactants and products (mol)

C
12

A
8

B
4

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Time (minutes)

6.1 Define a dynamic equilibrium. (2)


6.2 Use the information in the graph and write down the value of:
6.2.1 x (1)
6.2.2 y (1)
6.2.3 z (1)
6.3 Calculate the equilibrium constant, K c , for this hypothetical reaction at room
temperature if the volume of the closed container is 3 dm3. (7)
6.4 At t = 4 minutes, the temperature of the system was increased to 60 °C. Is the
REVERSE reaction EXOTHERMIC or ENDOTHERMIC? Explain how you
arrived at the answer. (3)
[15]
Copyright reserved Please turn over
Physical Sciences/P2 13 DBE/2018
SCE

QUESTION 7 (Start on a new page.)

The reaction between a sulphuric acid (H 2 SO 4 ) solution and a sodium hydroxide


(NaOH) solution is investigated using the apparatus illustrated below.

Retort stand Burette

H2SO4(aq)

Erlenmeyer flask
NaOH(aq)

7.1 Write down the name of the experimental procedure illustrated above. (1)

7.2 What is the function of the burette? (1)

7.3 Define an acid in terms of the Arrhenius theory. (2)

7.4 Give a reason why sulphuric acid is regarded as a strong acid. (1)

7.5 Bromothymol blue is used as indicator. Write down the colour change that will
take place in the Erlenmeyer flask on reaching the endpoint of the titration.

Choose from the following:

BLUE TO YELLOW YELLOW TO BLUE GREEN TO YELLOW (1)

During the titration a learner adds 25 cm3 of NaOH(aq) of concentration 0,1 mol·dm-3
to an Erlenmeyer flask and titrates this solution with H 2 SO 4 (aq) of concentration
0,1 mol·dm-3. The balanced equation for the reaction that takes place is:

2NaOH(aq) + H 2 SO 4 (aq) → Na 2 SO 4 (aq) + 2H 2 O(ℓ)

7.6 Determine the volume of H 2 SO 4 (aq) which must be added to neutralise the
NaOH(aq) in the Erlenmeyer flask completely. (4)

7.7 If the learner passes the endpoint by adding 5 cm3 of the same H 2 SO 4 (aq) in
excess, calculate the pH of the solution in the flask. (7)
[17]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 14 DBE/2018
SCE

QUESTION 8 (Start on a new page.)

8.1 Consider the electrochemical cell represented by the cell notation below,
where X is an unknown metal:

Pt(s) | Fe2+(aq), Fe3+(aq) || X+(aq) | X(s)

The cell potential of this cell was found to be 0,03 V.

8.1.1 Write down the type of electrochemical cell illustrated above. (1)

8.1.2 What does the single line (|) in the above cell notation represent? (1)

8.1.3 Write down the half-reaction that takes place at the anode in the
above cell. (2)

8.1.4 Identify X with the aid of a calculation. (5)

8.2 A Pt(s) | Fe2+(aq), Fe3+(aq) half-cell is connected to a Cu(s) | Cu2+(aq) half-


cell.

Write down the:

8.2.1 Chemical symbol for the electrode in the cathode half-cell (1)

8.2.2 NAME of the oxidising agent (1)

8.2.3 Overall balanced cell reaction that takes place in this cell (3)
[14]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 15 DBE/2018
SCE

QUESTION 9 (Start on a new page.)

The diagram below shows an electrolytic cell used to electroplate an iron rod with
COPPER. Solution X is made up of an unknown NITRATE.

Power
source

Iron rod A

Solution X

9.1 Solutions, such as solution X, are always used in electrochemical cells.

9.1.1 Write down the general term used to describe these solutions. (1)

9.1.2 What is the function of these solutions in electrochemical cells? (1)

9.2 Write down the FORMULA of solution X. (1)

9.3 Which electrode (A or IRON ROD) is the negative electrode? Give a reason
for the answer. (2)

9.4 Write down the half-reaction that takes place at electrode A. (2)

9.5 Electrode A is now replaced by a silver rod without making any other changes
to the cell. After a while, TWO metallic ions are found to be present in the
solution.

9.5.1 Name the TWO metallic ions present in the solution. (2)

9.5.2 Refer to the relative strengths of oxidising agents to explain which


ONE of the two ions will preferably be involved in the plating
process. (2)
[11]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 16 DBE/2018
SCE

QUESTION 10 (Start on a new page.)

The flow diagram below shows the steps used to prepare fertilisers X and Y. Labels I
and II represent types of chemical reactions and P is a compound.

P + H2(g)

H2SO4 I
Fertiliser X Ammonia NO (g) Brown gas

Liquid C
II

Fertiliser Y

10.1 Write down the NAME of the reaction labelled:

10.1.1 I (1)

10.1.2 II (1)

10.2 Write down the NAME or FORMULA of:

10.2.1 Compound P (1)

10.2.2 The brown gas (1)

10.2.3 Liquid C (1)

10.3 Write down a balanced equation for:

10.3.1 The preparation of fertiliser X (3)

10.3.2 Reaction I (3)

10.4 Fertiliser Y is ammonium nitrate. Calculate the mass percentage of nitrogen


in fertiliser Y. (3)
[14]

TOTAL: 150

Copyright reserved
SENIOR CERTIFICATE EXAMINATIONS/
NATIONAL SENIOR CERTIFICATE EXAMINATIONS

PHYSICAL SCIENCES: CHEMISTRY (P2)

2019

MARKS: 150

TIME: 3 hours

This question paper consists of 15 pages and 4 data sheets.

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 3 DBE/2019
SC/NSC

QUESTION 1: MULTIPLE-CHOICE QUESTIONS

Various options are provided as possible answers to the following questions. Choose
the answer and write only the letter (A–D) next to the question numbers (1.1 to 1.10) in
the ANSWER BOOK, e.g. 1.11 D.

1.1 Which ONE of the following is a SECONDARY alcohol?

A Ethanol

B Butan-1-ol

C Butan-2-ol

D 2-methylbutan-1-ol (2)

1.2 Which ONE of the following will RAPIDLY decolourise bromine water?

A CH3CHCH2

B CH3CH2CH3

C CH3COOCH3

D CH3CH2COOH (2)

1.3 A FUNCTIONAL ISOMER of ethyl propanoate is …

A C4H9CHO.

B C5H11OH.

C C4H9COOH.

D CH3(CH2)3CHO. (2)

1.4 Consider the balanced equation for a chemical reaction below.

2NO(g) + O2(g)  2NO2(g)

The activation energy of the forward and reverse reactions are 156 kJ·mol-1
and 175 kJ·mol-1 respectively.

The heat of reaction, in kJ·mol-1, for this reaction is …

A –19.

B +19.

C +331.

D –331. (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 4 DBE/2019
SC/NSC

1.5 The reaction given below reaches equilibrium in a closed container. The Kc
value is 0,04 at a certain temperature.

2SO2(g) + O2(g) ⇌ 2SO3(g) H < 0

Which ONE of the following factors will change the Kc value to 0,4?

A Increase in pressure

B Decrease in pressure

C Increase in temperature

D Decrease in temperature (2)

1.6 Which ONE of the following statements best describes a state of dynamic
equilibrium?

A The limiting reagent has been used up.

B The forward and reverse reactions have stopped.

C The rates of the forward and reverse reactions are equal.

D The concentration of products equals the concentration of reactants. (2)

1.7 During a titration to determine the concentration of an acid using a standard


base, a learner pipettes the base into a conical flask. She then uses a small
amount of water to rinse the inside of the flask so that all the base is part of
the solution in the flask.

How will the extra water added to the flask affect the results of this titration?

The concentration of the acid …

A cannot be determined.

B will be lower than expected.

C will be higher than expected.

D will be the same as expected. (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 5 DBE/2019
SC/NSC

1.8 The standard reduction potentials for two substances used to set up a
galvanic cell are as follows:

Sn2+ + 2e– ⇌ Sn Eθ = – 0,14 V

Cu2+ + 2e– ⇌ Cu Eθ = 0,34 V

Which ONE of the following combinations gives the substances formed at


each electrode when the cell is functioning?

Cathode Anode
A Cu2+ Sn
B Sn Cu2+
C Sn2+ Cu
D Cu Sn2+ (2)

1.9 Which ONE of the following half-reactions takes place at the POSITIVE
ELECTRODE of an electrochemical cell used to electroplate an iron rod with
silver?

A Ag+ + e–  Ag

B Fe2+ + 2e–  Fe

C Ag  Ag+ + e–

D Fe  Fe2+ + 2e– (2)

1.10 Which ONE of the following elements is a primary nutrient?

A Potassium

B Sulphur

C Oxygen

D Carbon (2)
[20]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 6 DBE/2019
SC/NSC

QUESTION 2 (Start on a new page.)

The letters A to F in the table below represent six organic compounds.

H H O H
CH3 CH3
A B H C C C C H
CH2 CH2
H H H
C CH3CCCH2CH3 D Butyl propanoate
H Br Br H H H

H C C C C C C H
H H H H

H C C C C H H H H H H
E F
H C H
H H H O
H C H
H
H

2.1 Is compound C SATURATED or UNSATURATED? Give a reason for the


answer. (2)

2.2 Write down the LETTER that represents each of the following:

2.2.1 An ester (1)

2.2.2 A FUNCTIONAL ISOMER of butanal (1)

2.2.3 A compound with the general formula CnH2n-2 (1)

2.2.4 A compound used as reactant in the preparation of compound D (1)

2.3 Write down the STRUCTURAL FORMULA of:

2.3.1 The functional group of compound C (1)

2.3.2 Compound D (2)

2.3.3 A CHAIN ISOMER of compound A (2)

2.4 Write down the:

2.4.1 IUPAC name of compound F (3)

2.4.2 Balanced equation, using MOLECULAR FORMULAE, for the


complete combustion of compound A (3)
[17]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 7 DBE/2019
SC/NSC

QUESTION 3 (Start on a new page.)

Three compounds are used to investigate one of the factors that influences boiling
point. The results obtained are shown in the table below.

MOLECULAR MASS BOILING POINT


COMPOUND
(g∙mol-1) (°C)
A Butane 58 – 0,5
B Propan-1-ol 60 98
C Ethanoic acid 60 118

3.1 In one investigation the boiling points of compound B and compound C are
compared.

3.1.1 Is this a fair investigation? Write down YES or NO. Refer to the data
in the table and give a reason for the answer. (2)

3.1.2 Write down the independent variable for this investigation. (1)

3.2 Which ONE of the compounds (A, B or C) has the highest vapour pressure?
Give a reason for the answer. (2)

3.3 Refer to the intermolecular forces present in each compound and FULLY
explain the trend in boiling points, as shown in the above table. (5)

3.4 Which compound, BUTAN-1-OL or PROPAN-1-OL, has the higher boiling


point? Give a reason for the answer. (2)
[12]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 8 DBE/2019
SC/NSC

QUESTION 4 (Start on a new page.)

4.1 The balanced equation for a polymerisation reaction is shown below.

H H
H H
n C C C C
H H
H H n

Write down the:

4.1.1 Type of polymerisation reaction represented by the equation (1)

4.1.2 IUPAC name of the monomer (1)

4.1.3 IUPAC name of the polymer (1)

4.2 Propan-1-ol undergoes two different reactions, as shown in the diagram


below.

Propan-1-ol Reaction 1 Compound Y


HCℓ

Reaction 2
conc. H2SO4

Reaction 3 Compound Z
Compound X
H2O/conc. H2SO4 (major product)

Write down the:

4.2.1 Type of reaction represented by reaction 2 (1)

4.2.2 Function of concentrated H2SO4 in reaction 2 (1)

4.2.3 IUPAC name of compound X (2)

4.2.4 STRUCTURAL FORMULA of compound Y (2)

4.2.5 Type of reaction represented by reaction 3 (1)

4.2.6 IUPAC name of compound Z (2)


[12]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 9 DBE/2019
SC/NSC

QUESTION 5 (Start on a new page.)

Learners use the reaction of a sodium thiosulphate solution with dilute hydrochloric
acid to investigate several factors that affect the rate of a chemical reaction.
The balanced equation for the reaction is:

Na2S2O3(aq) + 2HCℓ(aq) → 2NaCℓ(aq) + SO2(g) + S(s) + H2O(ℓ)

5.1 Define reaction rate. (2)

Three investigations (I, II and III) are carried out.

5.2 INVESTIGATION I

The results obtained in INVESTIGATION I are shown in the graph below.

GRAPH OF REACTION RATE VERSUS


CONCENTRATION OF Na2S2O3(aq)
Reaction rate (mol∙s-1)

Concentration (mol∙dm-3)

For this investigation, write down the:

5.2.1 Dependent variable (1)

5.2.2 Conclusion that can be drawn from the results (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 10 DBE/2019
SC/NSC

5.3 INVESTIGATION II

The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution curves, A and B, below represent the


number of particles against kinetic energy for the reaction at two different
temperatures.

KEY:
Particles that undergo
Number of particles

A effective collisions

B P

Kinetic energy

5.3.1 What does line P represent? (1)


5.3.2 Which curve (A or B) was obtained at the higher temperature? (1)
5.3.3 Explain, in terms of the collision theory, how an increase in
temperature influences the rate of a reaction. (4)

5.4 INVESTIGATION III

The potential energy diagrams, X and Y, below represent the reaction under
two different conditions.

X
Potential energy (kJ)

Reaction coordinate

Give a reason why curve Y differs from curve X. (1)

5.5 In one of the investigations, 100 cm3 of 0,2 mol·dm–3 HCℓ(aq) reacts with
excess Na2S2O3(aq) and the solution is then filtered. After filtration of the
solution, 0,18 g of sulphur is obtained. Calculate the PERCENTAGE YIELD of
sulphur. (6)
[18]
Copyright reserved Please turn over
Physical Sciences/P2 11 DBE/2019
SC/NSC

QUESTION 6 (Start on a new page.)

The balanced equation below represents the reaction used in the Haber process to
produce ammonia.

N2(g) + 3H2(g) ⇌ 2NH3(g) ∆H < 0

In industry the product is removed as quickly as it forms.

6.1 Write down the meaning of the double arrow used in the equation above. (1)

6.2 Give ONE reason why ammonia is removed from the reaction vessel as
quickly as it forms. (1)

The graph below shows the percentage yield of ammonia at different temperatures and
pressures.

GRAPH OF PERCENTAGE YIELD OF AMMONIA VERSUS PRESSURE

350 °C
40

30
% yield of ammonia

450 °C

20

500 °C
10

0 100 200 300 400


Pressure (atmosphere)

6.3 Write down the percentage yield of ammonia at a temperature of 450 °C and
a pressure of 200 atmospheres. (1)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 12 DBE/2019
SC/NSC

6.4 Refer to Le Chatelier's principle to explain EACH of the following deductions


made from the graph:

6.4.1 For a given pressure, the yield of ammonia at 500 °C is much lower
than that at 350 °C (3)

6.4.2 For a given temperature, the yield of ammonia at 350 atmospheres


is much higher than that at 150 atmospheres (2)

6.5 A technician prepares NH3(g) by reacting 6 moles of H2(g) and 6 moles of


N2(g).

6.5.1 Calculate the maximum number of moles of NH3(g) that can be


obtained in this reaction. (2)

6.5.2 The above reaction now takes place in a 500 cm3 container at a
temperature of 350 °C and a pressure of 150 atmospheres. The
system is allowed to reach equilibrium.

Use the graph above and calculate the equilibrium constant, Kc, for
this reaction under these conditions. (7)
[17]

QUESTION 7 (Start on a new page.)

7.1 Define a base in terms of the Arrhenius theory. (2)

7.2 Explain how a weak base differs from a strong base. (2)

7.3 Write down the balanced equation for the hydrolysis of NaHCO3. (3)

7.4 A learner wishes to identify element X in the hydrogen carbonate, XHCO3.


To do this she dissolves 0,4 g of XHCO3 in 100 cm3 of water. She then titrates
all of this solution with a 0,2 mol dm-3 hydrochloric acid (HCℓ) solution. Methyl
orange is used as the indicator during the titration.

7.4.1 Calculate the pH of the hydrochloric acid solution. (3)

7.4.2 Give a reason why methyl orange is a suitable indicator in this


titration. (1)

At the endpoint she finds that 20 cm3 of the acid neutralised ALL the
hydrogen carbonate solution. The balanced equation for the reaction is:

XHCO3(aq) + HCℓ(aq) → XCℓ(aq) + CO2(g) + H2O(ℓ)

7.4.3 Identify element X by means of a calculation. (6)


[17]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 13 DBE/2019
SC/NSC

QUESTION 8 (Start on a new page.)

The electrochemical cell below functions under standard conditions.

chlorine gas Q
Cr(s)

platinum
1 mol·dm-3 Cℓ −(aq) Cr 3 (aq)

half-cell A half-cell B

8.1 Give a reason why platinum is used as the electrode in half-cell A. (1)

8.2 Write down the:

8.2.1 Energy conversion that takes place in this cell (1)

8.2.2 Half-reaction that takes place at the cathode (2)

8.2.3 Cell notation for this cell (3)

8.3 Calculate the initial emf of this cell. (4)

8.4 Silver chloride is an insoluble salt.

What will be the effect on the cell potential when a small amount of silver
nitrate solution, AgNO3(aq), is added to half-cell A? Choose from
INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME. (2)
[13]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 14 DBE/2019
SC/NSC

QUESTION 9 (Start on a new page.)

The diagrams below represent two electrochemical cells.

P, Q, X and Y are carbon electrodes.

Cell A Cell B

DC source

P Q X Y

concentrated concentrated
NaCℓ(aq) CuCℓ2(aq)

When cell B is functioning, the mass of electrode X increases.

9.1 What type of electrochemical cell, GALVANIC or ELECTROLYTIC, is


illustrated above? (1)

9.2 Write down the half-reaction that takes place at electrode Q. (2)

9.3 The products formed in the two cells are compared.

9.3.1 Name ONE substance that is produced in BOTH cells. (1)

9.3.2 Write down the LETTERS of the TWO electrodes where this product
is formed. Choose from P, Q, X and Y. (2)

9.4 Is electrode X the CATHODE or the ANODE? Give a reason for the answer. (2)

9.5 Write down the net (overall) cell reaction that takes place in cell B. (3)
[11]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 15 DBE/2019
SC/NSC

QUESTION 10 (Start on a new page.)

10.1 The four steps in the manufacture of an inorganic fertiliser are listed below.
These steps are NOT written in the order in which they occur.

Step I: Sulphuric acid reacts with ammonia to produce ammonium


sulphate.
Step II: Sulphur dioxide reacts with oxygen to produce sulphur trioxide.
Step III: Oleum is diluted with water to produce sulphuric acid.
Step IV: Sulphur trioxide is bubbled in concentrated sulphuric acid to
produce oleum.

Write down the:

10.1.1 Correct order in which the steps occur in the preparation of the
inorganic fertiliser by using the numbers I to IV (1)

10.1.2 Balanced chemical equation for step I (3)

10.1.3 NAME of the catalyst used in step II (1)

10.1.4 Balanced chemical equation for step IV (3)

10.1.5 Reason why sulphur trioxide is NOT dissolved in water in step IV (1)

10.2 The diagram below shows a bag of NPK fertiliser. One of the numbers of the
NPK ratio on the bag is labelled as X.

NPK

X-1-2 (20)

50 kg

If the mass of potassium in the bag is 3,33 kg, calculate the value of X. (4)
[13]

TOTAL: 150

Copyright reserved
SENIOR CERTIFICATE EXAMINATIONS/
NATIONAL SENIOR CERTIFICATE EXAMINATIONS

PHYSICAL SCIENCES: PHYSICS (P2)

2021

MARKS: 150

TIME: 3 hours

This question paper consists of 15 pages and 4 data sheets.

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 3 DBE/2021
SC/NSC

QUESTION 1: MULTIPLE-CHOICE QUESTIONS

Various options are provided as possible answers to the following questions. Choose
the answer and write only the letter (A–D) next to the question numbers (1.1 to 1.10) in
the ANSWER BOOK, e.g. 1.11 E.

1.1 Which ONE of the following compounds has hydrogen bonds between
molecules?

A Pentanal

B Pentan-2-one

C Pentanoic acid

D Methyl butanoate (2)

1.2 To which homologous series does a compound with molecular formula


C6H12O2 belong?

A Ketones

B Alcohols

C Aldehydes

D Carboxylic acids (2)

1.3 Which functional groups are involved in the formation of esters?

A Formyl and carbonyl

B Hydroxyl and carbonyl

C Hydroxyl and carboxyl

D Carbonyl and carboxyl (2)

1.4 The equation below represents a reaction at equilibrium.

2CrO24 (aq) + 2H+(aq) ⇌ Cr2 O 72 (aq) + H2O(ℓ)


yellow orange

Which ONE of the following will change the colour of the mixture from yellow
to orange?

A Addition of sodium hydroxide pellets

B Addition of concentrated hydrochloric acid

C Increase in pressure at constant temperature

D Decrease in pressure at constant temperature (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 4 DBE/2021
SC/NSC

1.5 Consider the potential energy graph for the reaction shown below.

Potential energy (kJ∙mol-1)


Q

Course of reaction

The activation energy for the FORWARD reaction in terms of P, Q and R is:

A Q

B R−P

C Q−R

D Q−P (2)

1.6 A reaction reaches equilibrium in a closed container according to the following


balanced equation:

3H2(g) + N2(g) ⇌ 2NH3(g) ∆H < 0

Which ONE of the following changes will INCREASE the value of the
equilibrium constant?

A Removing NH3(g)

B Heating the container

C Cooling the container

D Increasing the volume of the container (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 5 DBE/2021
SC/NSC

1.7 Sulphuric acid ionises in water according to the following equations:

H2SO4(ℓ) + H2O(ℓ) ⇌ H3 O  (aq) + HSO4 (aq)


HSO4 (aq) + H2O(ℓ) ⇌ H3 O  (aq) + SO 24 (aq)

Consider the following statements regarding the ionisation above:

I: H2O(ℓ) acts as a base in both reactions.


II: HSO4 (aq) acts as an ampholyte.
III: SO 24 (aq) is the conjugate base of H2SO4.

Which of the statements above is/are TRUE?

A I only

B I and II

C I and III

D I, II and III (2)

1.8 Which ONE of the following reactions, when used in a voltaic cell, will give a
positive reading on the voltmeter?

A Mg2+(aq) + Zn(s)  Mg(s) + Zn2+(aq)

B Cu(s) + 2Ag+(aq) → Cu2+(aq) + 2Ag(s)

C Co2+(aq) + Sn2+(aq)  Co(s) + Sn4+(aq)

D 3Ni2+(aq) + 2Fe(s)  3Ni(s) + 2Fe3+(aq) (2)

1.9 Which ONE of the following statements is CORRECT for an ELECTROLYTIC


CELL?

A The anode is the positive electrode.

B The cathode is the positive electrode.

C Oxidation takes place at the cathode.

D Reduction takes place at the anode. (2)

1.10 Which ONE of the following shows the industrial processes in which
AMMONIA is a reactant and a product respectively?

REACTANT PRODUCT
A Ostwald Contact
B Ostwald Haber
C Contact Haber
D Contact Ostwald (2)
[20]
Copyright reserved Please turn over
Physical Sciences/P2 6 DBE/2021
SC/NSC

QUESTION 2 (Start on a new page.)

The letters A to F in the table below represent six organic compounds.

A Methanoic acid B Pentanal

Br
CH CH2 CH3
C C10H22 D
CH3 (CH2)2 CH CH2

Br
H
H C O H
H H H O H
H H H H H C C C C C H
E F
H C C C C C H H H H H
H H H H H

2.1 Write down the LETTER(S) that represent(s) the following:

2.1.1 A ketone (1)

2.1.2 TWO compounds that are FUNCTIONAL ISOMERS (1)

2.1.3 A hydrocarbon (1)

2.2 For compound D, write down the:

2.2.1 Homologous series to which it belongs (1)

2.2.2 IUPAC name (3)

2.3 Consider compound F.

Write down the IUPAC name of its:

2.3.1 POSITIONAL isomer (2)

2.3.2 CHAIN isomer (2)

2.4 During the reaction of compound A with compound E in the presence of an


acid catalyst, two products are formed.

For the ORGANIC product formed, write down the:

2.4.1 IUPAC name (2)

2.4.2 STRUCTURAL FORMULA of its FUNCTIONAL GROUP (1)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 7 DBE/2021
SC/NSC

2.5 Compound C (C10H22) reacts at high temperatures and pressures to form a


three-carbon alkene P and an alkane Q, as shown below.

C10H22 P + Q

Write down the:

2.5.1 Type of reaction that takes place (1)

2.5.2 Molecular formula of compound Q (2)

2.5.3 STRUCTURAL FORMULA of compound P (2)


[19]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 8 DBE/2021
SC/NSC

QUESTION 3 (Start on a new page.)

Learners use compounds A, B and C to investigate one of the factors that influences
the VAPOUR PRESSURE of organic compounds.

A Butan-1-ol

B Butan-2-one

C Propanoic acid

3.1 Define the term vapour pressure. (2)

3.2 Write down the independent variable for this investigation. (1)

3.3 Which compound, A or B, has the higher vapour pressure? (1)

3.4 Fully explain the answer to QUESTION 3.3.


Include the TYPES OF INTERMOLECULAR FORCES in your explanation. (4)

3.5 The graph below represents the relationship between vapour pressure and
temperature for compound A at sea level. X and Y represent different
temperatures.
Vapour pressure (kPa)

101,3

X Y
Temperature (°C)

3.5.1 Write down the term for the temperature represented by X. (1)

3.5.2 State the phase of compound A at temperature Y. Choose from


GAS, LIQUID or SOLID. (1)

3.5.3 Redraw the graph above in your ANSWER BOOK. On the same
set of axes, sketch the curve that will be obtained for compound C.
Clearly label curve A and curve C. (2)
[12]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 9 DBE/2021
SC/NSC

QUESTION 4 (Start on a new page.)

4.1 The flow diagram below shows the conversion of propane to propan-2-ol.

H H H
Step 1 Step 2
H C C C H X Propan-2-ol
Br2
H H H

4.1.1 State ONE reaction condition for Step 1. (1)

4.1.2 Write down the NAME or FORMULA of the INORGANIC product


formed in Step 1. (1)

4.1.3 Name the TYPE of substitution reaction represented by Step 2. (1)

4.1.4 Write down the NAME or FORMULA of the INORGANIC reagent


needed in Step 2. (1)

4.1.5 Write down the IUPAC name of compound X. (2)

4.2 Ethane can be prepared from chloroethane (CH3CH2Cℓ) by a TWO-STEP


process. You are supplied with the following chemicals:

concentrated concentrated
H2 HCℓ Cℓ2 H2O Pt Ethanol
H2SO4 NaOH

Select chemicals in the table above that can be used for this preparation.

Using CONDENSED structural formulae, write down a balanced equation for


EACH reaction. Indicate the reaction conditions for EACH reaction. (8)
[14]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 10 DBE/2021
SC/NSC

QUESTION 5 (Start on a new page.)

Two experiments, I and II, are conducted to investigate one of the factors that affects
the rate of the reaction of aluminium carbonate, Aℓ2(CO3)3, with EXCESS hydrochloric
acid, HCℓ. The balanced equation for the reaction is:

Aℓ2(CO3)3(s) + 6HCℓ(aq) → 2AℓCℓ3(aq) + 3H2O(ℓ) + 3CO2(g)

The apparatus used is shown below.

Hydrochloric acid

Aℓ2(CO3)3

The reaction conditions used for each experiment are as follows:

Experiment I:
100 cm3 of 1,5 mol∙dm-3 HCℓ(aq) reacts with 0,016 mol Aℓ2(CO3)3 granules at 25 °C

Experiment II:
50 cm3 of 2 mol∙dm-3 HCℓ(aq) reacts with 0,016 mol Aℓ2(CO3)3 granules at 25 °C

5.1 Define the term rate of a reaction. (2)

5.2 Using the experimental setup above, state the measurements that must be
made to determine the rate of this reaction. (2)

5.3 Use the collision theory to explain how the average reaction rate in
Experiment I differs from the average reaction rate in Experiment II. (3)

5.4 The average rate of the reaction in Experiment II during the first 2,5 minutes
is 4,4 x 10-3 mol∙min-1.

Calculate the number of moles of Aℓ2(CO3)3 that remains in the flask after
2,5 minutes. (3)

5.5 Calculate the maximum volume of CO2(g) that can be prepared at 25 °C in


Experiment I. Take molar gas volume at 25 °C as 24 000 cm3∙mol-1. (3)
[13]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 11 DBE/2021
SC/NSC

QUESTION 6 (Start on a new page.)

Pure hydrogen iodide gas, HI(g), of concentration 1 mol∙dm-3, is sealed in a 500 cm3
container at temperature T. The reaction reaches equilibrium according to the following
balanced equation:

2HI(g) ⇌ H2(g) + I2(g)

6.1 Define the term chemical equilibrium. (2)

6.2 The graph below shows how the concentrations of the reactant and products
vary with time during the reaction.
Concentration (mol∙dm-3)

4 6
Time (minutes)

6.2.1 Which ONE of the curves, X or Y, represents the changes in the


concentration of the products? Give a reason for the answer. (2)

6.2.2 How does the rate of the forward reaction compare to that of the
reverse reaction at t = 4 minutes? Choose from HIGHER THAN,
LOWER THAN or EQUAL TO. (1)

6.3 The equilibrium constant, Kc, for the reaction is 0,04 at temperature T.
Calculate the number of moles of iodine, I2(g), present at time t = 6 minutes. (9)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 12 DBE/2021
SC/NSC

6.4 The graph below shows how the rates of the forward and reverse reactions
change with time.

Reaction rate (mol∙min-1)

Forward reaction
Reverse reaction

6 10 12 14
Time (minutes)

The temperature of the container is increased at t = 10 minutes.

6.4.1 Which reaction(s) show(s) an increase in rate at t = 10 minutes?


Choose from FORWARD, REVERSE or BOTH FORWARD AND
REVERSE. (1)

6.4.2 Is the heat of reaction (∆H) for this reaction POSITIVE or


NEGATIVE? Fully explain the answer. (4)
[19]

QUESTION 7 (Start on a new page.)

Learners prepare a solution of known concentration by dissolving 2 g pure sodium


hydroxide crystals, NaOH, in water in a 250 cm3 volumetric flask.

7.1 Write down the term for the underlined phrase. (1)

7.2 Calculate the:

7.2.1 Concentration of the sodium hydroxide solution (4)

7.2.2 pH of the solution (4)

The learners now react 1,5 g of pure CaCO3 with 50 cm3 dilute HCℓ of unknown
concentration. The EXCESS HCℓ is neutralised with 25 cm3 of the NaOH solution that
they prepared. The balanced equations for the reactions are:

2HCℓ(aq) + CaCO3(s) → CaCℓ2(aq) + CO2(g) + H2O(ℓ)

HCℓ(aq) + NaOH(aq) → NaCℓ(aq) + H2O(ℓ)

7.3 Calculate the initial concentration of the dilute HCℓ(aq). (8)


[17]
Copyright reserved Please turn over
Physical Sciences/P2 13 DBE/2021
SC/NSC

QUESTION 8 (Start on a new page.)

8.1 When a piece of sodium metal (Na) is added to water in a test tube, hydrogen
gas is released. When phenolphthalein indicator is added to the test tube, the
solution turns pink.

8.1.1 Define the term reduction in terms of electron transfer. (2)

8.1.2 Write down the reduction half-reaction. (2)

8.1.3 Write down the balanced equation for the reaction that takes place (3)

8.1.4 Give a reason why the solution turns pink. (1)

When a piece of copper is added to water in a test tube, no reaction is


observed.

8.1.5 Refer to the relative strengths of the REDUCING AGENTS to


explain why no reaction is observed. (3)

8.2 Consider the cell notation below.

Pb(s) | Pb2+(aq) || Fe3+(aq), Fe2+(aq) | Pt(s)

8.2.1 What does the single line (|) in the cell notation above represent? (1)

8.2.2 State the energy conversion that takes place in this cell. (1)

8.2.3 Calculate the initial emf of the cell under standard conditions. (4)
[17]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 14 DBE/2021
SC/NSC

QUESTION 9 (Start on a new page.)

The diagrams below show two electrochemical cells in which carbon electrodes are
used. In cell A, concentrated copper (II) chloride solution is used and in cell B, liquid
aluminium oxide is used.

Y
concentrated Aℓ2O3(ℓ)
CuCℓ2(aq)

Cell A Cell B

9.1 What type of electrochemical cell, ELECTROLYTIC or GALVANIC, is shown


above? Give a reason for the answer. (2)

9.2 Write down the:

9.2.1 Half-reaction that takes place at the anode of cell A (2)

9.2.2 Half-reaction that takes place at the cathode of cell B (2)

9.2.3 NAME or FORMULA of the product formed at the cathode of cell A (1)

9.3 Give a reason why the mass of electrode Y decreases after a while. (1)
[8]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 15 DBE/2021
SC/NSC

QUESTION 10 (Start on a new page.)

10.1 The incomplete equations below show the four steps involved in the industrial
preparation of sulphuric acid (H2SO4). A and B represent two compounds.

Step I: S(s) + O2(g)  A

Step II: A + O2(g) ⇌ B

Step III: B + H2SO4  H2S2O7

Step IV: H2S2O7 + H2O  H2SO4

Write down the NAME or FORMULA of:

10.1.1 Compound A (1)

10.1.2 Compound B (1)

10.1.3 The catalyst used in Step II (1)

The sulphuric acid formed in Step IV is used to prepare ammonium sulphate.

10.1.4 Write down a balanced equation for this reaction. (3)

10.2 The diagram below shows a bag of fertiliser.

1 – 3 – 2 (26)

10.2.1 Write down the meaning of NPK. (1)

10.2.2 The bag contains 4 kg of ammonium nitrate, NH4NO3, which is the


only source of nitrogen. Calculate the mass of the fertiliser in the
bag. (4)
[11]

TOTAL: 150

Copyright reserved
SENIOR CERTIFICATE EXAMINATIONS/
NATIONAL SENIOR CERTIFICATE EXAMINATIONS

PHYSICAL SCIENCES: CHEMISTRY (P2)

2022

MARKS: 150

TIME: 3 hours

This question paper consists of 16 pages and 4 data sheets.

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 2 DBE/2022
SC/NSC

INSTRUCTIONS AND INFORMATION

1. Write your centre number and examination number in the appropriate spaces
on the ANSWER BOOK.

2. This question paper consists of NINE questions. Answer ALL the questions in
the ANSWER BOOK.

3. Start EACH question on a NEW page in the ANSWER BOOK.

4. Number the answers correctly according to the numbering system used in this
question paper.

5. Leave ONE line between two subquestions, e.g. between QUESTION 2.1 and
QUESTION 2.2.

6. You may use a non-programmable calculator.

7. You may use appropriate mathematical instruments.

8. Show ALL formulae and substitutions in ALL calculations.

9. Round off your FINAL numerical answers to a minimum of TWO decimal


places.

10. Give brief motivations, discussions, etc. where required.

11. You are advised to use the attached DATA SHEETS.

12. Write neatly and legibly.

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 3 DBE/2022
SC/NSC

QUESTION 1: MULTIPLE-CHOICE QUESTIONS

Various options are provided as possible answers to the following questions.


Each question has only ONE correct answer. Choose the answer and write only the
letter (A–D) next to the question numbers (1.1 to 1.10) in the ANSWER BOOK,
e.g. 1.11 E.

1.1 Which ONE of the following compounds has the LOWEST melting point?

A Hexane

B Ethane

C Butane

D Octane (2)

1.2 When CH2 = CH2 is converted to CH3CH3, the type of reaction is …

A hydration.

B hydrolysis.

C halogenation.

D hydrogenation. (2)

1.3 Which ONE of the following compounds in solution will change the colour of
bromothymol blue?

A CH3CH2CHO

B CH3CH2COOH

C CH3CH2COCH3

D CH3CH2COOCH3 (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 4 DBE/2022
SC/NSC

1.4 Two DIFFERENT samples of IMPURE CaCO3 of EQUAL masses react with
0,1 mol∙dm-3 H2SO4. Assume that the impurities do not react.

The graph below shows the volume of CO2(g) produced for each reaction.

Volume of CO2 produced (cm3)

reaction 2

reaction 1

Time (s)

When compared to reaction 2, which ONE of the following statements BEST


explains the curve obtained for reaction 1?

A The temperature is higher in reaction 1.

B The surface area is greater in reaction 2.

C The amount of impurities is greater in reaction 2.

D The amount of impurities is greater in reaction 1. (2)

1.5 The equation below represents a hypothetical reaction.

A(g) + B(g) ⇌ C(g) ΔH = - 50 kJ·mol-1

The activation energy for the REVERSE reaction is 110 kJ·mol-1.

Which ONE of the following is the activation energy (in kJ·mol-1) for the
FORWARD reaction?

A 50

B 60

C 110

D 160 (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 5 DBE/2022
SC/NSC

1.6 A reaction reaches equilibrium at 25 °C in a flask according to the following


balanced equation:

Co(H2O) 26  (aq) + 4Cℓ─(aq) ⇌ CoCℓ 24  (aq) + 6H2O(ℓ) ∆H > 0


pink blue

Which ONE of the following will change the colour of the mixture from pink to
blue?

A Adding water

B Cooling the flask

C Adding NaOH(aq)

D Adding NH4Cℓ(aq) (2)

1.7 Dilute nitric acid is added to distilled water at 25 °C.

How will this affect the hydronium ion concentration [H3O+] and the ionisation
constant (Kw) of water at 25 °C?

[H3O+] Kw
A Increases Increases
B Increases Decreases
C Increases Remains the same
D Remains the same Remains the same (2)

1.8 Consider the ionisation reactions I and II.

I H2PO 4 + H2O(ℓ) ⇌ H3O+(aq) + X

II X + H2O(ℓ) ⇌ H3O+(aq) + Y

Which ONE of the following combinations represents the formulae of X and Y


respectively?

X Y
2
A HPO 4 PO 34
B HPO24 H3PO4
C H3PO4 PO 34
D HPO24 H2PO 4 (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 6 DBE/2022
SC/NSC

1.9 An electrochemical cell was set up using a Hg(ℓ)|Hg2+(aq) half-cell and


another half-cell under standard conditions.

Which ONE of the following half-cells, when connected to the Hg(ℓ)|Hg2+(aq)


half-cell, will result in the HIGHEST cell potential?

A Aℓ(s)|Aℓ3+(aq)

B Zn(s)|Zn2+(aq)

C Co(s)|Co2+(aq)

D Pt(s)|H2(g)|H+(aq) (2)

1.10 The following reaction takes place in an electrochemical cell:

CuCℓ2(aq) → Cu(s) + Cℓ2(g)

Which ONE of the following is CORRECT for this cell?

A It is a galvanic cell.

B A power source is needed.

C The reaction is spontaneous.

D Copper acts as the oxidising agent. (2)


[20]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 7 DBE/2022
SC/NSC

QUESTION 2 (Start on a new page.)

The letters A to H in the table below represent eight organic compounds.

Br CH3 H H

A CH3 CCH2 CH CH CH3 B H C C C C H

CH3 CH3 H H H H

C Pent-2-ene D CH3CH2CH2CHO

E Butan-2-one F 4,4-dimethylpent-2-yne

G Butane H CH3CH2CH2COOH

2.1 Write down the LETTER that represents a compound that:

2.1.1 Is a ketone (1)

2.1.2 Has the general formula CnH2n-2 (1)

2.1.3 Is an isomer of 2-methylbut-2-ene (1)

2.1.4 Has the same molecular formula as ethyl ethanoate (1)

2.2 Write down the:

2.2.1 IUPAC name of compound A (3)

2.2.2 STRUCTURAL FORMULA of compound F (3)

2.3 For compound D, write down the:

2.3.1 Homologous series to which it belongs (1)

2.3.2 NAME of its functional group (1)

2.3.3 STRUCTURAL FORMULA of its functional isomer (2)

2.4 For compound G, write down:

2.4.1 The IUPAC name of a chain isomer (2)

2.4.2 A balanced equation, using molecular formulae, for its complete


combustion (3)
[19]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 8 DBE/2022
SC/NSC

QUESTION 3 (Start on a new page.)

Learners investigate factors that influence the boiling points of organic compounds.
The boiling points of some organic compounds obtained are shown in the table below.

MOLECULAR MASS BOILING POINT


COMPOUND
(g∙mol-1) (°C)
A Propane 44 - 42
B Butane 58 - 0,5
C Pentane 72 36
D Methylbutane 72 28
E Ethanol 46 78
F Ethanal 44 20

3.1 Define the term boiling point. (2)

3.2 The boiling points of compounds A, B and C are compared.

3.2.1 How do the boiling points vary from compound A to compound C?

Choose from INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE


SAME. (1)

3.2.2 Explain the answer to QUESTION 3.2.1. (3)

3.3 The boiling points of compounds B, C and D are compared.

Is this a fair comparison?

Choose from YES or NO. Give a reason for the answer. (2)

3.4 The boiling points of compounds E and F are compared.

3.4.1 State the independent variable for this comparison. (1)

3.4.2 Write down the name of the strongest Van der Waals force present
in compound F. (1)

3.5 Which compound, D or E, has a higher vapour pressure? Give a reason for
the answer. (2)
[12]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 9 DBE/2022
SC/NSC

QUESTION 4 (Start on a new page.)

4.1 Study the following incomplete equations for organic reactions I and II.

Compounds P and Q are ORGANIC compounds and T is an INORGANIC


compound.

CH3

I CH3 CH CH CH3 + NaOH (conc.) P + NaBr + T


(major product)
Br

II CH3COOH + compound Q → butyl ethanoate + H2O

For reaction I, write down the:

4.1.1 Type of reaction that takes place (1)

4.1.2 IUPAC name of compound P (2)

4.1.3 NAME or FORMULA of compound T (1)

For reaction II, write down:

4.1.4 TWO reaction conditions needed (2)

4.1.5 The STRUCTURAL FORMULA of compound Q (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 10 DBE/2022
SC/NSC

4.2 The cracking of a long chain hydrocarbon, C10H22, takes place in test tube A,
as shown below.

cotton wool soaked in C10H22

A Aℓ2O3(s)

Br2(aq)

Two STRAIGHT CHAIN organic compounds, X and Z, are produced in


test tube A according to the following balanced equation:

C10H22(ℓ) → 2X(g) + Z(g)

4.2.1 State the function of the Aℓ2O3(s) in test tube A. (1)

The organic compounds, X and Z, are now passed through bromine water,
Br2(aq), at room temperature in test tube B. Only compound X reacts with the
bromine water.

4.2.2 Apart from gas bubbles being formed, state another observable
change in test tube B. (1)

4.2.3 Write down the TYPE of reaction that takes place in test tube B. (1)

4.2.4 Write down the molecular formula of compound Z. (3)

4.2.5 Write down the STRUCTURAL FORMULA of compound X. (3)


[17]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 11 DBE/2022
SC/NSC

QUESTION 5 (Start on a new page.)

Learners use the reaction of MgCO3(s) with EXCESS dilute HCℓ(aq) to investigate the
relationship between temperature and the rate of a chemical reaction.

The balanced equation for the reaction is:

MgCO3(s) + 2HCℓ(aq) → MgCℓ2(aq) + CO2(g) + H2O(ℓ)

The results obtained are represented in the graph below.

Graph of average rate of production of


CO2 (in g·min-1) versus temperature

0,6
Average rate of production of CO2

0,5

0,4
(g·min-1)

0,3

0,2

0,1

0
0 10 20 30 40 50
Temperature (°C)

5.1 Define the term rate of reaction. (2)

5.2 State TWO conditions that must be kept constant during this investigation. (2)

5.3 Use the collision theory to explain the relationship shown in the graph. (4)

5.4 The learners obtained the graph above using 5 g MgCO3(s) with EXCESS
HCℓ at 40 °C.

Calculate the:

5.4.1 Time taken for the reaction to run to completion (6)

5.4.2 Molar gas volume at 40 °C if 1,5 dm3 CO2 is collected in a syringe (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 12 DBE/2022
SC/NSC

5.5 The graph below represents the Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution curve for
CO2(g) at 40 °C.

Number of CO2 molecules


A

Kinetic energy

Redraw the graph above in the ANSWER BOOK. Clearly label the curve
as A.

On the same set of axes, sketch the curve that will be obtained for the CO2(g)
at 20 °C. Label this curve as B. (2)
[18]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 13 DBE/2022
SC/NSC

QUESTION 6 (Start on a new page.)

6.1 Initially, 4 moles H2(g) and 4 moles I2(g) are allowed to react in a sealed
2 dm3 flask according to the following balanced equation:
H2(g) + I2(g) ⇌ 2HI(g) ΔH < 0
The graph below shows the concentrations of H2(g) and HI(g) versus time
during the reaction.
Concentration (mol·dm-3)

Y
H2

HI

0
t1 t2
Time (s)
6.1.1 Write down the value of Y. (1)
6.1.2 State Le Chatelier's principle. (2)
6.1.3 Changes were made to the temperature of the flask at time t2.

Was the flask HEATED or COOLED? (1)


6.1.4 Fully explain the answer to QUESTION 6.1.3. (3)

6.2 The equation below represents the reversible reaction that takes place when
NO2(g) is converted to N2O4(g).
2NO2(g) ⇌ N2O4(g)
Initially, x mol of NO2(g) is sealed in a 1 dm3 container at 350 K. When
equilibrium is established at this temperature, 0,81 mol N2O4(g) is present in
the container.
6.2.1 Write down the meaning of the term reversible reaction. (1)
6.2.2 Show that the equilibrium constant for this reaction is given by
0,81
.
( x  1,62) 2 (5)
0,79 moles of N2O4(g) is now added to the equilibrium mixture above. When
the NEW equilibrium is established at 350 K, it is found that the amount of
NO2(g) increased by 1,2 moles.
6.2.3 Calculate the value of x. (6)
[19]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 14 DBE/2022
SC/NSC

QUESTION 7 (Start on a new page.)

7.1 Two acids, HX and HY, of EQUAL CONCENTRATIONS are compared.


The pH of HX is 2,7 and the pH of HY is 0,7.

7.1.1 Define an acid in terms of the Lowry-Brønsted theory. (2)

7.1.2 Which acid, HX or HY, is STRONGER? Give a reason for the


answer. (2)

7.1.3 Acid HX ionises in water according to the following equation:

HX(aq) + H2O(ℓ) ⇌ H3O+(aq) + X─(aq)

The Ka value for the reaction is 1,8 x 10-5 at 25 °C.

Is the concentration of the hydronium ions HIGHER THAN,


LOWER THAN or EQUAL TO the concentration of HX? Give a
reason for the answer. (2)

7.2 Learners add 150 cm3 of a sodium hydroxide solution, NaOH, of unknown
concentration to 200 cm3 of a 0,03 mol∙dm-3 hydrochloric acid solution, HCℓ,
as illustrated below. They find that the pH of the final solution is 2.
Assume that the volumes are additive.

NaOH(aq)
150 cm3

200 cm3 pH = 2

0,03 mol∙dm-3 HCℓ final solution

The balanced equation for the reaction is:

HCℓ(aq) + NaOH(aq) → NaCℓ(aq) + H2O(ℓ)

Calculate the:

7.2.1 Concentration of the H3O+ ions in the final solution (3)

7.2.2 Initial concentration of the NaOH(aq) (7)


[16]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 15 DBE/2022
SC/NSC

QUESTION 8 (Start on a new page.)

8.1 An electrochemical cell is set up using an aluminium rod, Aℓ, and a gas X.

The initial emf measured under standard conditions is 2,89 V.

8.1.1 State the standard conditions under which this cell operates. (3)

8.1.2 Use a calculation to identify gas X. (5)

8.1.3 Write down the FORMULA of the reducing agent in this cell. (1)

8.1.4 Write down the half-reaction that takes place at the cathode. (2)

8.1.5 Write down the cell notation for this cell. (3)

8.2 Which container, ZINC or COPPER, will be more suitable to store an aqueous
solution of nickel ions, Ni2+?

Refer to the Table of Standard Reduction Potentials to fully explain the


answer in terms of the relative strengths of reducing agents. (4)
[18]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 16 DBE/2022
SC/NSC

QUESTION 9 (Start on a new page.)

The simplified diagram below represents an electrochemical cell used for the
electrolysis of a concentrated sodium chloride solution, NaCℓ(aq). X and Y are carbon
electrodes.

power
source

electrode Y electrode X

concentrated NaCℓ(aq)

9.1 Define the term electrolysis. (2)

9.2 Chlorine gas, Cℓ2(g), is released at electrode X.

Write down the:

9.2.1 Letter (X or Y) of the electrode where oxidation takes place (1)

9.2.2 Half-reaction that takes place at electrode Y (2)

9.2.3 Direction in which electrons flow in the external circuit

Choose from X to Y OR Y to X. (1)

9.2.4 Balanced equation for the net (overall) cell reaction that takes
place in the cell (3)

9.3 How will the pH of the electrolyte change during the reaction?

Choose from INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME. (1)

9.4 Give a reason for the answer to QUESTION 9.3. (1)


[11]

TOTAL: 150

Copyright reserved
SENIOR CERTIFICATE EXAMINATIONS/
NATIONAL SENIOR CERTIFICATE EXAMINATIONS

PHYSICAL SCIENCES: CHEMISTRY (P2)

2023

MARKS: 150

TIME: 3 hours

This question paper consists of 16 pages and 4 data sheets.

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 2 DBE/2023
SC/NSC

INSTRUCTIONS AND INFORMATION

1. Write your centre number and examination number in the appropriate spaces
on the ANSWER BOOK.

2. This question paper consists of NINE questions. Answer ALL the questions in
the ANSWER BOOK.

3. Start EACH question on a NEW page in the ANSWER BOOK.

4. Number the answers correctly according to the numbering system used in this
question paper.

5. Leave ONE line between two subquestions, e.g. between QUESTION 2.1 and
QUESTION 2.2.

6. You may use a non-programmable calculator.

7. You may use appropriate mathematical instruments.

8. Show ALL formulae and substitutions in ALL calculations.

9. Round off your FINAL numerical answers to a minimum of TWO decimal


places.

10. Give brief motivations, discussions, etc. where required.

11. You are advised to use the attached DATA SHEETS.

12. Write neatly and legibly.

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 3 DBE/2023
SC/NSC

QUESTION 1: MULTIPLE-CHOICE QUESTIONS

Various options are provided as possible answers to the following questions. Each
question has only ONE correct answer. Choose the answer and write only the letter
(A–D) next to the question numbers (1.1 to 1.10) in the ANSWER BOOK, e.g. 1.11 E.

1.1 For which ONE of the following molecular formulae are CHAIN isomers
possible?

A C4H10

B C3H8

C C2H6O

D C3H8O (2)

1.2 Which ONE of the following compounds has the LOWEST vapour pressure
under the same conditions?

H H H H H H O

A H C C C C H B H C C C

H H H H H H H

H H H H O H
C H C C C O H D H C C
H H H H O
(2)

1.3 The type of organic compound formed when a haloalkane is heated in the
presence of a concentrated strong base is an …

A alkane.

B alkene.

C alkyne.

D alcohol. (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 4 DBE/2023
SC/NSC

1.4 EXCESS HCℓ(aq) of concentration 0,1 mol∙dm-3 reacts with 2 g of Mg under


different conditions.

Which ONE of the following combinations of conditions will produce the


largest volume of H2(g) in the FIRST MINUTE of the reaction?

STATE OF TEMPERATURE OF HCℓ(aq)


DIVISION OF Mg (°C)
A Powder 20
B Granules 20
C Powder 50
D Granules 50 (2)

1.5 The potential energy diagram for a chemical reaction is shown below.

Z
Potential energy (kJ)

X
0
Course of reaction

Which ONE of the following combinations is CORRECT for the FORWARD


reaction?

POTENTIAL ENERGY OF
ACTIVATION
∆H THE ACTIVATED
ENERGY
COMPLEX
A YX Z+Y Z
B YX ZY Z+Y
C XY ZY Z
D XY Z ZY (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 5 DBE/2023
SC/NSC

1.6 Consider the following reaction that reaches equilibrium in a beaker:


2- 2-
2Cr (aq) + 2H+(aq) ⇌ r2 (aq) + H2 (ℓ)

A few drops of concentrated NaOH(aq) are now added to the beaker.

Which ONE of the following combinations correctly identifies the


DISTURBANCE ON THE SYSTEM and the SYSTEM'S RESPONSE to the
disturbance?

DISTURBANCE ON THE
SYSTEM'S RESPONSE
SYSTEM
A [H+] decreases Forward reaction favoured
B [H+] decreases Reverse reaction favoured
2-
C [Cr ] decreases Reverse reaction favoured
2-
D [Cr ] increases Forward reaction favoured (2)

1.7 According to the Lowry-Brønsted theory, a conjugate base is formed when


a/an …

A proton is added to the acid.

B electron is added to the acid.

C proton is removed from the acid.

D electron is removed from the acid. (2)

1.8 Consider the statements below regarding an alkaline substance.

An alkaline substance:

(i) Reacts with an acid to form a neutral solution

(ii) Turns red litmus blue

(iii) Forms a salt when it reacts with an acid

Which of the statements above are ALWAYS TRUE?

A (i), (ii) and (iii)

B (i) and (ii) only

C (i) and (iii) only

D (ii) and (iii) only (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 6 DBE/2023
SC/NSC

1.9 Consider the cell notation for a galvanic cell.

Pt | H2(g) | OH─(aq) | H2 (ℓ) || Ag+(aq) | Ag(s)

Which ONE of the following equations represents the half-reaction taking


place at the positive electrode?

A Ag+(aq) + e → Ag(s)

B Ag(s) → Ag+(aq) + e

C 2H2 (ℓ) + 2e─ → H2(g) + 2OH─(aq)

D H2(g) + 2OH─ (aq) → 2H2O(ℓ) + 2e─ (2)

1.10 A concentrated solution of sodium chloride, NaCℓ(aq), undergoes electrolysis.

Which ONE of the combinations correctly shows the products formed at each
electrode?

CATHODE ANODE
A Na Cℓ2
B H2 OH─
C Cℓ2 H2 and OH─
D H2 and OH─ Cℓ2 (2)
[20]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 7 DBE/2023
SC/NSC

QUESTION 2 (Start on a new page.)

Study the table below and answer the questions that follow.

H H
H C C H

H H H H
H H H H
A B H C C C O H
H C C C C C H
H H H
H H H H

H C H
H
C C4H8O D CH3(CH2)4CHCH2
E CXHYOZ

2.1 Define the term unsaturated hydrocarbon. (2)

2.2 Write down the:

2.2.1 Letter that represents an UNSATURATED hydrocarbon (1)

2.2.2 IUPAC name of compound A (3)

2.2.3 IUPAC name of the POSITIONAL isomer of compound B (2)

2.2.4 IUPAC name of compound D (2)

2.2.5 Balanced equation, using MOLECULAR FORMULAE, for the


complete combustion of compound A (3)

2.3 The formula C4H8O represents two compounds that are functional isomers of
each other.

2.3.1 Define the term functional isomer. (2)

2.3.2 Write down the STRUCTURAL FORMULAE of each of these


two FUNCTIONAL isomers. (4)

2.4 A 2 g sample of compound E contains 1,09 g carbon and


0,18 g hydrogen. The molecular mass of compound E is 88 g∙mol-1.

Determine the molecular formula of compound E by means of a calculation. (6)


[25]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 8 DBE/2023
SC/NSC

QUESTION 3 (Start on a new page.)

Learners investigate the boiling points of the four organic compounds given below.

ORGANIC COMPOUND MOLECULAR MASS (g∙mol-1)


Butanone 72
Butan-1-ol 74
Propanoic acid 74
2-methylpropan-1-ol 74

3.1 Define the term boiling point. (2)

3.2 Which compound, butan-1-ol or 2-methylpropan-1-ol, will have the higher


boiling point? Fully explain the answer. (4)

The curves P, Q, R and S below were obtained from the results of the investigation.
X represents a specific temperature.

X P

Q
Temperature (°C)

Time (minute)

3.3 Which physical property is represented by temperature X? (1)

3.4 Which curve (P, Q, R or S) represents:

3.4.1 Butanone (1)

3.4.2 Propanoic acid (1)

3.4.3 2-methylpropan-1-ol (1)

3.5 Give a reason for the answer to QUESTION 3.4.2. (1)


[11]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 9 DBE/2023
SC/NSC

QUESTION 4 (Start on a new page.)

4.1 The flow diagram below shows different organic reactions.


P, Q and R are organic compounds.

Reaction 4
Alcohol P Compound Q

Reaction 3

Reaction 2 Br2 Reaction 1


Compound R
(major product) H ℓ

1,2-dibromo-2-methylpropane

Reaction 1 is an addition reaction.

Write down:

4.1.1 The TYPE of addition reaction (1)

4.1.2 ONE observable change which occurs in the container during the
reaction (1)

4.1.3 The STRUCTURAL FORMULA of compound Q (2)

Consider reaction 2.

4.1.4 Write down the IUPAC name of compound R. (2)

For reaction 3, write down:

4.1.5 A balanced equation using STRUCTURAL FORMULAE for the


organic compounds (6)

4.1.6 The IUPAC name of alcohol P (2)

Reaction 4 is an elimination reaction.

4.1.7 Write down the TYPE of elimination reaction. (1)

4.2 Butan-1-ol reacts with propanoic acid in the presence of a catalyst.

Write down the:

4.2.1 TYPE of reaction that takes place (1)

4.2.2 IUPAC name of the organic product formed (2)


[18]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 10 DBE/2023
SC/NSC

QUESTION 5 (Start on a new page.)

Consider the following decomposition reaction that takes place in a sealed


2 dm3 container:

2N2O5(g) → 4NO2(g) + O2(g)

The graph below shows how the concentrations of N2O5(g) and NO2(g) change with
time.

Concentration-time graph
300
• A

250 •

Concentration (x 10-4 mol·dm-3)

200 • •
• •
150

• •
100 •

• • •B
50

0
0 200 400 600 800
Time (s)

5.1 Refer to the graph above and give a reason why curve A represents the
change in the concentration of NO2(g). (1)

5.2 Consider the statement below:

The rate of decomposition of N2O5(g) is half the rate of formation of NO2(g).

Is this statement TRUE or FALSE? Give a reason for the answer. (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 11 DBE/2023
SC/NSC

5.3 Calculate the:

5.3.1 Mass of NO2(g) present in the container at 400 s (4)

5.3.2 Average rate of production of O2(g) in mol∙dm-3∙s-1 in 700 s (4)

5.4 The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution curve for the N2O5(g) initially present in
the container is shown below.

Number of particles

Kinetic energy

The initial concentration of the N2O5(g) is now INCREASED.

5.4.1 Redraw the distribution curve above in the ANSWER BOOK and
label this curve as P.

On the same set of axes, sketch the curve that will be obtained for
the higher concentration of N2O5(g). Label this curve as Q. (2)

5.4.2 Will the rate of decomposition of N2O5(g) at the higher


concentration be HIGHER THAN, LOWER THAN or EQUAL TO
the original rate of decomposition? Explain the answer using the
collision theory. (3)
[16]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 12 DBE/2023
SC/NSC

QUESTION 6 (Start on a new page.)

One mole of pure hydrogen iodide gas, HI(g), is sealed in a 1 dm3 container at 721 K.
Equilibrium is reached according to the following balanced equation:

2HI(g) ⇌ H2(g) + I2(g)

It is found that 0,11 moles of I2(g) are present at equilibrium.

6.1 State Le Chatelier's principle. (2)

6.2 Determine the number of moles of EACH of the following at equilibrium:

6.2.1 H2(g) (1)

6.2.2 HI(g) (1)

6.3 The equilibrium constant, Kc, at 721 K is 0,02.

The temperature of the container is now increased to 850 K.


The equilibrium constant, Kc, at 850 K is 0,09.

6.3.1 Is the forward reaction EXOTHERMIC or ENDOTHERMIC? (1)

6.3.2 Fully explain the answer to QUESTION 6.3.1. (3)

6.3.3 Calculate the mass of HI(g) present at the new equilibrium at


850 K. (8)
[16]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 13 DBE/2023
SC/NSC

QUESTION 7 (Start on a new page.)

7.1 The conductivity of three acid solutions, A, B and C, as shown below is


investigated at the same temperature.

A 0,1 mol·dm-3 H2SO4(aq)


B 0,1 mol·dm-3 HNO3(aq)
C 0,1 mol·dm-3 CH3COOH(aq)

The brightness of the bulb in the apparatus shown below is used as a


measure of the conductivity of the solutions.

Carbon electrode

Acid

The acid solutions are electrolytes.

7.1.1 Define the term electrolyte. (2)

The brightness of the bulb for each of the solutions is compared.

7.1.2 In which solution, A or B, will the bulb be brighter? Give a reason


for the answer by referring to the types of acids. (2)

7.1.3 In which solution, B or C, will the bulb be brighter? Give a reason


for the answer by referring to the types of acids. (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 14 DBE/2023
SC/NSC

7.2 A hydrochloric acid solution, H ℓ(aq), is standardised by titrating it against


25 cm3 of a 0,04 mol·dm-3 sodium carbonate solution Na2CO3(aq). At the
endpoint, it is found that 19,5 cm3 of H ℓ(aq) has reacted.

The balanced equation for the reaction is:

Na2CO3(aq) + 2H ℓ(aq) → 2Na ℓ(aq) + 2(g) + H2 (ℓ)

7.2.1 alculate the concentration of the H ℓ(aq). (3)

7.2.2 Suppose a few drops of water were present in the burette before it
was filled with the hydrochloric acid solution.

How will the volume of the H ℓ solution needed to reach the


endpoint be affected?

Choose from GREATER THAN, SMALLER THAN or REMAINS


THE SAME. Give a reason for the answer. (2)

A concentrated household product, ChemClean, contains ammonia as the


main cleaning agent. To determine the amount of ammonia present in 1 dm 3
of ChemClean, the following procedure is followed:

20 cm3 of ChemClean is added to a 250 cm3 flask. The flask is then filled to
the 250 cm3 mark with distilled water.

ChemClean 1 dm3 Distilled water

20 cm3
Concentrated 250 cm3 diluted
ChemClean ChemClean
The diluted solution is titrated against the hydrochloric acid solution of the
concentration as calculated in QUESTION 7.2.1.

During the titration, 22 cm3 of the diluted ChemClean solution is neutralised


by 18,7 cm3 of the HCℓ solution. The balanced equation for the reaction is:

NH3(aq) + H ℓ(aq) → NH+ (aq) + ℓ ─(aq)

7.2.3 Calculate the mass of ammonia in 1 dm3 of ChemClean. (7)

7.2.4 Will the pH of the solution at the end of the titration be GREATER
THAN 7, EQUAL TO 7 or LESS THAN 7?
Write down the relevant equation as motivation for the answer. (3)
[21]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 15 DBE/2023
SC/NSC

QUESTION 8 (Start on a new page.)

Learners want to identify an unknown metal X using a standard half-cell, X│X2+.

They set up an electrochemical cell under standard conditions using two half-cells, as
shown in the diagram below.

V
H2(g)
Y

Platinum

X2+(aq) H+(aq)

The initial emf of this cell is 1,20 V.

8.1 State the standard conditions under which this cell functions. (3)

8.2 State ONE function of component Y. (1)

After the cell has operated for some time, it is found that the mass of electrode X has
increased.

8.3 Identify X by means of a suitable calculation. (5)

8.4 Write down the oxidation half-reaction that takes place in this cell. (2)

Half-cell X│X2+ is now replaced by an Au│Au3+ half-cell.

The initial emf of the cell is now 1,50 V. As the cell operates, the Au electrode
increases in mass.

8.5 Arrange the oxidising agents, X2+, Au3+ and H+, in order of increasing
strength.

Fully explain the answer. (3)


[14]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 16 DBE/2023
SC/NSC

QUESTION 9 (Start on a new page.)

The simplified electrolytic cell below is used to electroplate a metal spring. Zinc nitrate,
Zn(NO3)2(aq), is used as an electrolyte and R is an electrode.

Power
supply

Metal spring

Zn(NO3)2(aq)

9.1 Define the term electrolytic cell. (2)

9.2 Which electrode (R or METAL SPRING) is the ANODE? Give a reason for the
answer. (2)

9.3 Write down the:

9.3.1 Equation for the half-reaction occurring at the metal spring (2)

9.3.2 NAME or FORMULA of a suitable metal that can be used as


electrode R (1)

9.4 Explain the answer to QUESTION 9.3.2. (2)


[9]

TOTAL: 150

Copyright reserved
Physical Sciences/P2 1 DBE/2023
SC/NSC

DATA FOR PHYSICAL SCIENCES GRADE 12


PAPER 2 (CHEMISTRY)

GEGEWENS VIR FISIESE WETENSKAPPE GRAAD 12


VRAESTEL 2 (CHEMIE)

TABLE 1: PHYSICAL CONSTANTS/TABEL 1: FISIESE KONSTANTES

NAME/NAAM SYMBOL/SIMBOOL VALUE/WAARDE


Standard pressure
p 1,013 x 105 Pa
Standaarddruk
Molar gas volume at STP
Vm 22,4 dm3∙mol-1
Molêre gasvolume by STD
Standard temperature
Standaardtemperatuur T 273 K
Charge on electron
e -1,6 x 10-19 C
Lading op elektron
Avogadro's constant
NA 6,02 x 1023 mol-1
Avogadro-konstante

TABLE 2: FORMULAE/TABEL 2: FORMULES

m N
n n
M NA
n m V
c or/of c n
V MV Vm
ca a na
pH = -log[H3O+]
cb b nb

Kw = [H3O+][OH-] = 1 x 10-14 at/by 298 K

Eθcell  Eθcathode  Eθanode / Eθsel  Ekatode


θ
 Eθanode

or/of
Eθcell  Ereduction
θ
 Eθoxidation / Eθsel  Ereduksie
θ
 Eθoksidasie

or/of
Eθcell  Eθoxidisingagent  Ereducing
θ
agent / E sel  Eoksideermiddel  Ereduseermiddel
θ θ θ

I= n= where n = number of electrons


t qe

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 2 DBE/2023
SC/NSC
TABLE 3: THE PERIODIC TABLE OF ELEMENTS
TABEL 3: DIE PERIODIEKE TABEL VAN ELEMENTE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
(I) (II) (III) (IV) (V) (VI) (VII) (VIII)
Atomic number
1 KEY/SLEUTEL Atoomgetal 2
2,1

H He
1 29 4
3 4 Electronegativity Symbol 5 6 7 8 9 10
Cu

1,9
1,0

1,5

2,0

2,5

3,0

3,5

4,0
Li Be Elektronegatiwiteit
63,5
Simbool B C N O F Ne
7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Aℓ Cℓ
0,9

1,2

1,5

1,8

2,1

2,5

3,0
Na Mg Approximate relative atomic mass Si P S Ar
23 24 Benaderde relatiewe atoommassa 27 28 31 32 35,5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
0,8

1,0

1,3

1,5

1,6

1,6

1,5

1,8

1,8

1,8

1,9

1,6

1,6

1,8

2,0

2,4

2,8
K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 63,5 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
0,8

1,0

1,2

1,4

1,8

1,9

2,2

2,2

2,2

1,9

1,7

1,7

1,8

1,9

2,1

2,5
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe
86 88 89 91 92 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
55 56 57 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
Tℓ
0,7

0,9

1,6

1,8

1,8

1,9

2,0

2,5
Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Pb Bi Po At Rn
133 137 139 179 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209
87 88 89
0,7

0,9

Fr Ra Ac 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
226
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
140 141 144 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
232 238

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 3 DBE/2023
SC/NSC
TABLE 4A: STANDARD REDUCTION POTENTIALS
TABEL 4A: STANDAARD-REDUKSIEPOTENSIALE
Half-reactions/Halfreaksies E θ (V)
F2(g) + 2e ⇌ 2F + 2,87
3+  2+
Co +e ⇌ Co + 1,81
+ 
H2O2 + 2H +2e ⇌ 2H2O +1,77
  2+

+
MnO 4 + 8H + 5e Mn + 4H2O + 1,51
 
ℓ2(g) + 2e ⇌ 2 ℓ + 1,36
2  3+

+
Cr2O 7 + 14H + 6e 2Cr + 7H2O + 1,33
+ 
O2(g) + 4H + 4e ⇌ 2H2O + 1,23

Increasing strength of reducing agents /Toenemende sterkte van reduseermiddels


MnO2 + 4H + 2e
+ 2+
Increasing strength of oxidising agents /Toenemende sterkte van oksideermiddels

⇌ Mn + 2H2O + 1,23
2+ 
Pt + 2e ⇌ Pt + 1,20
Br2(ℓ) + 2e ⇌ 2Br + 1,07
 + 
NO 3 + 4H + 3e ⇌ NO(g) + 2H2O + 0,96
2+ 
Hg + 2e ⇌ Hg(ℓ) + 0,85
+ 
Ag + e ⇌ Ag + 0,80
 + 
NO 3 + 2H + e ⇌ NO2(g) + H2O + 0,80
3+  2+
Fe +e ⇌ Fe + 0,77
O2(g) + 2H + 2e
+
⇌ H2O2 + 0,68
 
I2 + 2e ⇌ 2I + 0,54
Cu + e
+
⇌ Cu + 0,52
+ 
SO2 + 4H + 4e ⇌ S + 2H2O + 0,45
2H2O + O2 + 4e ⇌ 4OH + 0,40
2+ 
Cu + 2e ⇌ Cu + 0,34
2 

+
SO 4 + 4H + 2e SO2(g) + 2H2O + 0,17
2+  +
Cu +e ⇌ Cu + 0,16
+ 2e
4+ 2+
Sn ⇌ Sn + 0,15
+ 
S + 2H + 2e ⇌ H2S(g) + 0,14
2H + 2e
+
⇌ H2(g) 0,00

 0,06
3+
Fe + 3e ⇌ Fe
+ 2e  0,13
2+
Pb ⇌ Pb

 0,14
2+
Sn + 2e ⇌ Sn
+ 2e  0,27
2+
Ni ⇌ Ni

 0,28
2+
Co + 2e ⇌ Co
+ 2e  0,40
2+
Cd ⇌ Cd
 2+
 0,41
3+
Cr +e ⇌ Cr
+ 2e  0,44
2+
Fe ⇌ Fe
+ 3e  0,74
3+
Cr ⇌ Cr

 0,76
2+
Zn + 2e ⇌ Zn
2H2O + 2e ⇌ H2(g) + 2OH  0,83

 0,91
2+
Cr + 2e ⇌ Cr
+ 2e  1,18
2+
Mn ⇌ Mn

 1,66
3+
Aℓ + 3e ⇌ Aℓ
+ 2e  2,36
2+
Mg ⇌ Mg

 2,71
+
Na + e ⇌ Na
+ 2e  2,87
2+
Ca ⇌ Ca

 2,89
2+
Sr + 2e ⇌ Sr
+ 2e  2,90
2+
Ba ⇌ Ba
+ -
Cs + e ⇌ Cs - 2,92

 2,93
+
K +e ⇌ K
Li + e  3,05
+
⇌ Li
Copyright reserved Please turn over
Physical Sciences/P2 4 DBE/2023
SC/NSC
TABLE 4B: STANDARD REDUCTION POTENTIALS
TABEL 4B: STANDAARD-REDUKSIEPOTENSIALE
Half-reactions/Halfreaksies E θ (V)
Li + e  3,05
+
⇌ Li
K + e  2,93
+
⇌ K

 2,92
+
Cs + e ⇌ Cs
+ 2e  2,90
2+
Ba ⇌ Ba

 2,89
2+
Sr + 2e ⇌ Sr
+ 2e  2,87
2+
Ca ⇌ Ca

 2,71
+
Na + e ⇌ Na

Increasing strength of reducing agents /Toenemende sterkte van reduseermiddels


+ 2e  2,36
2+
Mg ⇌ Mg
Increasing strength of oxidising agents /Toenemende sterkte van oksideermiddels


 1,66
3+
Aℓ + 3e ⇌ Aℓ
+ 2e  1,18
2+
Mn ⇌ Mn

 0,91
2+
Cr + 2e ⇌ Cr
2H2O + 2e ⇌ H2(g) + 2OH  0,83
+ 2e  0,76
2+
Zn ⇌ Zn

 0,74
3+
Cr + 3e ⇌ Cr
+ 2e  0,44
2+
Fe ⇌ Fe
 2+
 0,41
3+
Cr +e ⇌ Cr
+ 2e  0,40
2+
Cd ⇌ Cd

 0,28
2+
Co + 2e ⇌ Co
+ 2e  0,27
2+
Ni ⇌ Ni

 0,14
2+
Sn + 2e ⇌ Sn
+ 2e  0,13
2+
Pb ⇌ Pb

 0,06
3+
Fe + 3e ⇌ Fe
2H + 2e
+
⇌ H2(g) 0,00
S + 2H + 2e
+
⇌ H2S(g) + 0,14
4+  2+
Sn + 2e ⇌ Sn + 0,15
+ e
2+ +
Cu ⇌ Cu + 0,16
2
+ 4H + 2e ⇌
+
SO 4 SO2(g) + 2H2O + 0,17
+ 2e
2+
Cu ⇌ Cu + 0,34
 
2H2O + O2 + 4e ⇌ 4OH + 0,40
SO2 + 4H + 4e
+
⇌ S + 2H2O + 0,45
+ 
Cu + e ⇌ Cu + 0,52
I2 + 2e ⇌ 2I + 0,54
+ 
O2(g) + 2H + 2e ⇌ H2O2 + 0,68
+ e
3+ 2+
Fe ⇌ Fe + 0,77
 + 
NO 3 + 2H + e ⇌ NO2(g) + H2O + 0,80
+ 
Ag + e ⇌ Ag + 0,80
2+ 
Hg + 2e ⇌ Hg(ℓ) + 0,85
 + 
NO 3 + 4H + 3e ⇌ NO(g) + 2H2O + 0,96
 
Br2(ℓ) + 2e ⇌ 2Br + 1,07
+ 2 e
2+
Pt ⇌ Pt + 1,20
+  2+
MnO2 + 4H + 2e ⇌ Mn + 2H2O + 1,23
O2(g) + 4H + 4e
+
⇌ 2H2O + 1,23
2
+ 14H + 6e
3+

+
Cr2O 7 2Cr + 7H2O + 1,33
ℓ2(g) + 2e ⇌ 2 ℓ + 1,36

+ 8H + 5e
2+

+
MnO 4 Mn + 4H2O + 1,51
+ 
H2O2 + 2H +2 e ⇌ 2H2O +1,77
+ e
3+ 2+
Co ⇌ Co + 1,81
F2(g) + 2e ⇌ 2F + 2,87
Copyright reserved
Physical Sciences/P2 1 DBE/2022
SC/NSC

DATA FOR PHYSICAL SCIENCES GRADE 12


PAPER 2 (CHEMISTRY)

GEGEWENS VIR FISIESE WETENSKAPPE GRAAD 12


VRAESTEL 2 (CHEMIE)

TABLE 1: PHYSICAL CONSTANTS/TABEL 1: FISIESE KONSTANTES

NAME/NAAM SYMBOL/SIMBOOL VALUE/WAARDE


Standard pressure
p 1,013 x 105 Pa
Standaarddruk
Molar gas volume at STP
Vm 22,4 dm3∙mol-1
Molêre gasvolume by STD
Standard temperature
Standaardtemperatuur T 273 K
Charge on electron
e -1,6 x 10-19 C
Lading op elektron
Avogadro's constant
NA 6,02 x 1023 mol-1
Avogadro-konstante

TABLE 2: FORMULAE/TABEL 2: FORMULES

m N
n n
M NA
n m V
c or/of c n
V MV Vm
c a v a na
 pH = -log[H3O+]
c b v b nb

Kw = [H3O+][OH-] = 1 x 10-14 at/by 298 K

Eθcell  Eθcathode  Eθanode / Eθsel  Ekatode


θ
 Eθanode

or/of
Eθcell  Ereduction
θ
 Eθoxidation / Eθsel  Ereduksie
θ
 Eθoksidasie

or/of
Eθcell  Eθoxidising agent  Ereducing
θ
agent / E sel  Eoksideermiddel  Ereduseermiddel
θ θ θ

Q Q
n= or/of n=
e qe

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 2 DBE/2022
SC/NSC
TABLE 3: THE PERIODIC TABLE OF ELEMENTS
TABEL 3: DIE PERIODIEKE TABEL VAN ELEMENTE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
(I) (II) (III) (IV) (V) (VI) (VII) (VIII)
Atomic number
1 KEY/SLEUTEL Atoomgetal 2
2,1

H He
1 29 4
3 4 Electronegativity Symbol 5 6 7 8 9 10
Cu

1,9
1,0

1,5

2,0

2,5

3,0

3,5

4,0
Li Be Elektronegatiwiteit
63,5
Simbool B C N O F Ne
7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Aℓ Cℓ
0,9

1,2

1,5

1,8

2,1

2,5

3,0
Na Mg Approximate relative atomic mass Si P S Ar
23 24 Benaderde relatiewe atoommassa 27 28 31 32 35,5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
0,8

1,0

1,3

1,5

1,6

1,6

1,5

1,8

1,8

1,8

1,9

1,6

1,6

1,8

2,0

2,4

2,8
K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 63,5 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
0,8

1,0

1,2

1,4

1,8

1,9

2,2

2,2

2,2

1,9

1,7

1,7

1,8

1,9

2,1

2,5
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe
86 88 89 91 92 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
55 56 57 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
Tℓ
0,7

0,9

1,6

1,8

1,8

1,9

2,0

2,5
Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Pb Bi Po At Rn
133 137 139 179 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209
87 88 89
0,7

0,9

Fr Ra Ac 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
226
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
140 141 144 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
232 238

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 3 DBE/2022
SC/NSC
TABLE 4A: STANDARD REDUCTION POTENTIALS
TABEL 4A: STANDAARD-REDUKSIEPOTENSIALE
Half-reactions/Halfreaksies E θ (V)
F2(g) + 2e ⇌ 2F + 2,87
3+  2+
Co +e ⇌ Co + 1,81
H2O2 + 2H +2e
+
⇌ 2H2O +1,77

+ 8H + 5e
2+

+
MnO 4 Mn + 4H2O + 1,51
 
Cℓ2(g) + 2e ⇌ 2Cℓ + 1,36
2 +  3+
Cr2O 7 + 14H + 6e ⇌ 2Cr + 7H2O + 1,33
+ 
O2(g) + 4H + 4e ⇌ 2H2O + 1,23
+  2+
MnO2 + 4H + 2e ⇌ Mn + 2H2O + 1,23
+ 2e
2+
Pt ⇌ Pt + 1,20
 
Br2(ℓ) + 2e ⇌ 2Br + 1,07
 + 
NO 3 + 4H + 3e ⇌ NO(g) + 2H2O + 0,96

Increasing strength of reducing agents/Toenemende sterkte van reduseermiddels


Increasing strength of oxidising agents/Toenemende sterkte van oksideermiddels

2+ 
Hg + 2e ⇌ Hg(ℓ) + 0,85
Ag + e
+
⇌ Ag + 0,80
 + 
NO 3 + 2H + e ⇌ NO2(g) + H2O + 0,80
+ e
3+ 2+
Fe ⇌ Fe + 0,77
O2(g) + 2H + 2e
+
⇌ H2O2 + 0,68
 
I2 + 2e ⇌ 2I + 0,54
+ 
Cu + e ⇌ Cu + 0,52
SO2 + 4H + 4e
+ + 0,45
⇌ S + 2H2O
2H2O + O2 + 4e ⇌ 4OH + 0,40
2+ 
Cu + 2e ⇌ Cu + 0,34
2 

+
SO 4 + 4H + 2e SO2(g) + 2H2O + 0,17
2+  +
Cu +e ⇌ Cu + 0,16
4+  2+
Sn + 2e ⇌ Sn + 0,15
S + 2H + 2e
+
⇌ H2S(g) + 0,14
+ 
2H + 2e ⇌ H2(g) 0,00
+ 3e  0,06
3+
Fe ⇌ Fe
+ 2e  0,13
2+
Pb ⇌ Pb
+ 2e  0,14
2+
Sn ⇌ Sn
+ 2e  0,27
2+
Ni ⇌ Ni

 0,28
2+
Co + 2e ⇌ Co
+ 2e  0,40
2+
Cd ⇌ Cd
 2+
 0,41
3+
Cr +e ⇌ Cr
+ 2e  0,44
2+
Fe ⇌ Fe

 0,74
3+
Cr + 3e ⇌ Cr
+ 2e  0,76
2+
Zn ⇌ Zn
 
2H2O + 2e ⇌ H2(g) + 2OH  0,83
+ 2e  0,91
2+
Cr ⇌ Cr

 1,18
2+
Mn + 2e ⇌ Mn
+ 3e  1,66
3+
Aℓ ⇌ Aℓ

 2,36
2+
Mg + 2e ⇌ Mg
Na + e  2,71
+
⇌ Na
+ 2e  2,87
2+
Ca ⇌ Ca

 2,89
2+
Sr + 2e ⇌ Sr
+ 2e  2,90
2+
Ba ⇌ Ba
+ -
Cs + e ⇌ Cs - 2,92
K + e  2,93
+
⇌ K
Li + e  3,05
+
⇌ Li
Copyright reserved Please turn over
Physical Sciences/P2 4 DBE/2022
SC/NSC
TABLE 4B: STANDARD REDUCTION POTENTIALS
TABEL 4B: STANDAARD-REDUKSIEPOTENSIALE
Half-reactions/Halfreaksies E θ (V)
Li + e  3,05
+
⇌ Li
K + e  2,93
+
⇌ K

 2,92
+
Cs + e ⇌ Cs
+ 2e  2,90
2+
Ba ⇌ Ba

 2,89
2+
Sr + 2e ⇌ Sr
+ 2e  2,87
2+
Ca ⇌ Ca
Na + e  2,71
+
⇌ Na

 2,36
2+

Increasing strength of oxidising agents/Toenemende sterkte van oksideermiddels

Mg + 2e Mg

Increasing strength of reducing agents/Toenemende sterkte van reduseermiddels


+ 3e  1,66
3+
Aℓ ⇌ Aℓ

 1,18
2+
Mn + 2e ⇌ Mn
+ 2e  0,91
2+
Cr ⇌ Cr
 
2H2O + 2e ⇌ H2(g) + 2OH  0,83
+ 2e  0,76
2+
Zn ⇌ Zn

 0,74
3+
Cr + 3e ⇌ Cr
+ 2e  0,44
2+
Fe ⇌ Fe
 2+
 0,41
3+
Cr +e ⇌ Cr
+ 2e  0,40
2+
Cd ⇌ Cd

 0,28
2+
Co + 2e ⇌ Co
+ 2e  0,27
2+
Ni ⇌ Ni
+ 2e  0,14
2+
Sn ⇌ Sn

 0,13
2+
Pb + 2e ⇌ Pb
+ 3e  0,06
3+
Fe ⇌ Fe
+ 
2H + 2e ⇌ H2(g) 0,00
S + 2H + 2e
+
⇌ H2S(g) + 0,14
4+  2+
Sn + 2e ⇌ Sn + 0,15
+ e
2+ +
Cu ⇌ Cu + 0,16
2 + 
SO 4 + 4H + 2e ⇌ SO2(g) + 2H2O + 0,17
2+ 
Cu + 2e ⇌ Cu + 0,34
 
2H2O + O2 + 4e ⇌ 4OH + 0,40
SO2 + 4H + 4e
+
⇌ S + 2H2O + 0,45
+ 
Cu + e ⇌ Cu + 0,52
 
I2 + 2e ⇌ 2I + 0,54
O2(g) + 2H + 2e
+
⇌ H2O2 + 0,68
3+  2+
Fe +e ⇌ Fe + 0,77
 + 
NO 3 + 2H + e ⇌ NO2(g) + H2O + 0,80
+ 
Ag + e ⇌ Ag + 0,80
2+ 
Hg + 2e ⇌ Hg(ℓ) + 0,85

+ 4H + 3e
+
NO 3 ⇌ NO(g) + 2H2O + 0,96
 
Br2(ℓ) + 2e ⇌ 2Br + 1,07
+ 2 e
2+
Pt ⇌ Pt + 1,20
+  2+
MnO2 + 4H + 2e ⇌ Mn + 2H2O + 1,23
O2(g) + 4H + 4e
+
⇌ 2H2O + 1,23
2  3+

+
Cr2O 7 + 14H + 6e 2Cr + 7H2O + 1,33
 
Cℓ2(g) + 2e ⇌ 2Cℓ + 1,36
 +  2+
MnO 4 + 8H + 5e ⇌ Mn + 4H2O + 1,51
+ 
H2O2 + 2H +2 e ⇌ 2H2O +1,77
3+  2+
Co +e ⇌ Co + 1,81
F2(g) + 2e ⇌ 2F + 2,87
Copyright reserved
NATIONAL
SENIOR CERTIFICATE

GRADE 12

PHYSICAL SCIENCES: CHEMISTRY (P2)

FEBRUARY/MARCH 2016

MARKS: 150

TIME: 3 hours

This question paper consists of 15 pages, 4 data sheets and 1 graph sheet.

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 3 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2016
NSC

QUESTION 1: MULTIPLE-CHOICE QUESTIONS

Four options are provided as possible answers to the following questions. Each
question has only ONE correct answer. Choose the answer and write only the letter
(A–D) next to the question number (1.1–1.10) in the ANSWER BOOK, for example
1.11 E.

1.1 Which ONE of the following compounds is an aldehyde?

A CH 3 COCH 3

B CH 3 CH 2 CHO

C CH 3 CH 2 COOH

D CH 3 CH 2 CH 2 OH (2)

1.2 The equation below represents the decomposition of calcium carbonate.

CaCO 3 (s)  CaO(s) + CO 2 (g)

Which ONE of the following factors will increase the initial rate of
decomposition of calcium carbonate?

A Pressure

B Temperature

C Concentration

D Mass of CaCO 3 (s) (2)

1.3 Consider the cell notation of the galvanic cell below.

Zn│Zn2+║Cu2+│Cu

Which ONE of the following statements regarding this cell is TRUE?

A Copper is formed at the cathode.

B Copper is formed at the anode.

C Zinc is formed at the anode.

D Zinc is formed at the cathode. (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 4 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2016
NSC

1.4 Which ONE of the following compounds will react with sodium hydroxide
(NaOH) in a neutralisation reaction?

A CH 3 CHO

B CH 3 COOH

C CH 3 COCH 3

D CH 3 CH 2 OH (2)

1.5 Consider the reactant Y in the following reaction:

Y + H 2 O ⇌ H 3 O+ + H2PO −4

The formula of Y is:

A PO 34−

B H2PO −4

C HPO 24−

D H 3 PO 4 (2)

1.6 A gardener needs a fertiliser with the highest percentage of the relevant
nutrient to obtain a green lawn.

Which ONE of the following NPK fertilisers will give the best results?

A 8:1:5

B 7:1:1

C 3:2:3

D 3:1:5 (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 5 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2016
NSC

1.7 The activation energy for a certain reaction is 50 kJ∙mol-1. Energy is absorbed
when this reaction takes place.

Which ONE of the following is CORRECT for the REVERSE reaction?

ACTIVATION ENERGY HEAT OF REACTION


(E A) (ΔH)
A E A > 50 kJ∙mol-1 ΔH > 0
B E A > 50 kJ∙mol-1 ΔH < 0
C E A < 50 kJ∙mol-1 ΔH < 0
D E A < 50 kJ∙mol-1 ΔH > 0 (2)

1.8 Which ONE of the following pairs of compounds are FUNCTIONAL isomers?

A Methanol and methanal

B Butane and 2-methylpropane

C Propan-1-ol and propan-2-ol

D Propanoic acid and methyl ethanoate (2)

1.9 The balanced equations for three reactions at equilibrium in a closed


container are given below.

(i) C 2 H 4 (g) + H 2 (g) ⇌ C 2 H 6 (g)


(ii) Fe 3 O 4 (s) + 4H 2 (g) ⇌ 3Fe(s) + 4H 2 O(g)
(iii) SO 3 (g) + NO(g) ⇌ NO 2 (g) + SO 2 (g)

In which reaction(s) will the equilibrium position shift when the volume of the
reaction vessel is decreased at constant temperature?

A (i) only

B (i) and (ii) only

C (i) and (iii) only

D (i), (ii) and (iii) (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 6 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2016
NSC

1.10 In each of the electrolytic cells below, copper(II) sulphate is used as the
electrolyte. The electrodes are either carbon (C) or copper (Cu).
(i) (ii) (iii)

Cu Cu C Cu Cu C

In which cell(s) will the concentration of the electrolyte remain constant during
electrolysis?

A (i) only

B (i) and (ii) only

C (i) and (iii) only

D (ii) and (iii) only (2)


[20]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 7 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2016
NSC

QUESTION 2 (Start on a new page.)

2.1 Consider the organic compounds represented by the letters A to C below.


A Cℓ H H

H C C C H

H H

H H H H H
H C C C C C C H

H H H Cℓ H H

B H H H H C H H

H C C C C O H H C C C H

H H H H H O H

Write down the:

2.1.1 Name of the homologous series to which compound C belongs (1)

2.1.2 IUPAC name of compound A (3)


2.1.3 Structural formula of a tertiary alcohol that is a structural isomer of
compound B (2)
2.2 An alcohol and methanoic acid are heated in the presence of concentrated
sulphuric acid to form an ester.
2.2.1 What is the role of the concentrated sulphuric acid in this reaction? (1)
2.2.2 Write down the NAME or FORMULA of the inorganic product
formed. (1)
The ester contains 6,67% hydrogen (H), 40% carbon (C) and 53,33%
oxygen (O). The molar mass of the ester is 60 g·mol-1.

Use a calculation to determine its:


2.2.3 Empirical formula (5)
2.2.4 Molecular formula (3)
Write down the:
2.2.5 Structural formula of methanoic acid (1)
2.2.6 IUPAC name of the ester (2)
[19]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 8 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2016
NSC

QUESTION 3 (Start on a new page.)

3.1 Define the term boiling point. (2)

3.2 What is the relationship between strength of intermolecular forces and boiling
point? (1)

The relationship between strength of intermolecular forces and boiling point is


investigated using four organic compounds from different homologous series. The
compounds and their boiling points are given in the table below.

COMPOUND BOILING POINT (°C)


A Propane -42
B Propan-2-one 56
C Propan-1-ol 97
D Propanoic acid 141

3.3 Refer to the TYPE and the STRENGTH of intermolecular forces to explain the
difference in boiling points between:

3.3.1 Compounds A and B (3)

3.3.2 Compounds C and D (3)

3.4 Is compound B a GAS or a LIQUID at room temperature? (1)


[10]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 9 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2016
NSC

QUESTION 4 (Start on a new page.)

The flow diagram below shows different organic reactions using CH 2 = CH 2 as the
starting reactant. X, Y and Z represent different organic compounds.

Reaction 4 Reaction 1
C2H6 CH2 = CH2 Y

Reaction 2 + HCℓ

Reaction 3
X Z

4.1 During Reaction 1, CH 2 = CH 2 undergoes polymerisation to form


compound Y.

For this reaction, write down the:

4.1.1 Type of polymerisation (1)

4.1.2 NAME of compound Y (1)

4.2 For Reaction 2, write down the:

4.2.1 IUPAC name of compound X (2)

4.2.2 Type of addition reaction of which this is an example (1)

4.3 During Reaction 3, compound X reacts with excess hot water.

Write down the:

4.3.1 STRUCTURAL FORMULA of compound Z (2)

4.3.2 NAME or FORMULA of the INORGANIC product (1)

4.4 Reaction 4 is an addition reaction.

4.4.1 Is C 2 H 6 a SATURATED or an UNSATURATED compound? Give a


reason for the answer. (2)

4.4.2 Write down the NAME or FORMULA of the INORGANIC reactant


needed for this reaction. (1)

4.4.3 Using molecular formulae, write down a balanced equation for the
complete combustion of C 2 H 6 . (3)
[14]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 10 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2016
NSC

QUESTION 5 (Start on a new page.)

NOTE: The graph for QUESTION 5.3.2 must be drawn on the GRAPH SHEET
attached at the end of the QUESTION PAPER.

Methanol and hydrochloric acid react according to the following balanced equation:

CH 3 OH(aq) + HCℓ(aq)  CH 3 Cℓ(aq) + H 2 O(ℓ)

5.1 State TWO factors that can INCREASE the rate of this reaction. (2)

5.2 Define the term reaction rate. (2)

5.3 The rate of the reaction between methanol and hydrochloric acid is
investigated. The concentration of HCℓ(aq) was measured at different time
intervals. The following results were obtained:

TIME (MINUTES) HCℓ CONCENTRATION (mol∙dm-3)


0 1,90
15 1,45
55 1,10
100 0,85
215 0,60

5.3.1 Calculate the average reaction rate, in (mol∙dm-3)∙min-1 during the


first 15 minutes. (3)

5.3.2 Use the data in the table to draw a graph of concentration versus
time on the attached GRAPH SHEET.
NOTE: The graph is not a straight line.
(ATTACH THIS GRAPH SHEET TO YOUR ANSWER BOOK.) (3)

5.3.3 From the graph, determine the concentration of HCℓ(aq) at the


40th minute. (1)

5.3.4 Use the collision theory to explain why the reaction rate decreases
with time. Assume that the temperature remains constant. (3)

5.3.5 Calculate the mass of CH 3 Cℓ(aq) in the flask at the 215th minute.
The volume of the reagents remains 60 cm3 during the reaction. (5)
[19]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 11 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2016
NSC

QUESTION 6 (Start on a new page.)

Initially, 2,2 g of pure CO 2 (g) is sealed in an empty 5 dm3 container at 900 °C.

6.1 Calculate the initial concentration of CO 2 (g). (4)

6.2 Give a reason why equilibrium will not be established. (1)

CaCO 3 (s) is now added to the 2,2 g CO 2 (g) in the container and after a while
equilibrium is established at 900 °C according to the following balanced equation:

CaCO 3 (s) ⇌ CaO(s) + CO 2 (g)

The equilibrium constant for this reaction at 900 °C is 0,0108.

6.3 Give a reason why this reaction will only reach equilibrium in a SEALED
container. (1)

6.4 Calculate the minimum mass of CaCO 3 (s) that must be added to the
container to achieve equilibrium. (7)

6.5 How will EACH of the following changes affect the amount of CO 2 (g)?
Write down only INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME.

6.5.1 More CaCO 3 (s) is added at 900 °C (1)

6.5.2 The pressure is increased (1)

6.6 It is found that the equilibrium constant (K c ) for this reaction is 2,6 x 10-6 at
727 °C. Is the reaction EXOTHERMIC or ENDOTHERMIC? Fully explain how
you arrived at the answer. (4)
[19]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 12 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2016
NSC

QUESTION 7 (Start on a new page.)

7.1 Define an acid in terms of the Lowry-Brønsted theory. (2)

7.2 Carbonated water is an aqueous solution of carbonic acid, H 2 CO 3 .


H 2 CO 3 (aq) ionises in two steps when it dissolves in water.

7.2.1 Write down the FORMULA of the conjugate base of H 2 CO 3 (aq). (1)

7.2.2 Write down a balanced equation for the first step in the ionisation of
carbonic acid. (3)

7.2.3 The pH of a carbonic acid solution at 25 °C is 3,4. Calculate the


hydroxide ion concentration in the solution. (5)

7.3 X is a monoprotic acid.

7.3.1 State the meaning of the term monoprotic. (1)

7.3.2 A sample of acid X is titrated with a standard sodium hydroxide


solution using a suitable indicator.

At the endpoint it is found that 25 cm3 of acid X is neutralised by


27,5 cm3 of the sodium hydroxide solution of concentration
0,1 mol∙dm-3.

Calculate the concentration of acid X. (5)

7.3.3 The concentration of H 3 O+ ions in the sample of acid X is


2,4 x 10-4 mol∙dm-3.

Is acid X a WEAK or a STRONG acid? Explain the answer by


referring to the answer in QUESTION 7.3.2. (3)
[20]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 13 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2016
NSC

QUESTION 8 (Start on a new page.)

An electrochemical cell consisting of half-cells A and B is assembled under standard


conditions as shown below.

Half-cell A Pt, Cℓ 2 (101,3 kPa) | Cℓ- (1 mol∙dm-3)


Half-cell B Mg2+ (1 mol∙dm-3) | Mg(s)

8.1 At which half-cell, A or B, are electrons released into the external circuit? (1)

8.2 Write down the:

8.2.1 Reduction half-reaction that takes place in this cell (2)

8.2.2 NAME or FORMULA of the substance whose oxidation number


DECREASES (1)

8.3 Calculate the initial cell potential of this cell when it is in operation. (4)

8.4 Write down an observation that will be made in half-cell B as the cell
operates. Give a reason for the answer. (2)
[10]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 14 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2016
NSC

QUESTION 9 (Start on a new page.)

The electrochemical cell below is set up to demonstrate the purification of copper.

B A

Copper(II) chloride
solution

9.1 Write down the type of electrochemical cell illustrated above. (1)

The graphs below show the change in mass of the electrodes whilst the cell is in
operation.

P
Mass (g)

Time (min.)

9.2 Define a reducing agent in terms of electron transfer. (2)

9.3 Which graph represents the change in mass of electrode A? (1)

9.4 Write down the half-reaction that takes place at electrode A. (2)

9.5 Electrodes A and B are now replaced by graphite electrodes. It is observed


that chlorine gas (Cℓ 2 ) is released at one of the electrodes.

At which electrode (A or B) is chlorine gas formed? Fully explain how it is


formed. (3)
[9]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 15 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2016
NSC

QUESTION 10 (Start on a new page.)

Ammonium nitrate is an important fertiliser. It is produced by reacting nitric acid with


ammonia. Both nitric acid and ammonia are prepared on a large scale in industry.

10.1 Write down the name of the industrial preparation of nitric acid. (1)

10.2 The catalytic oxidation of ammonia is one of the steps in the process named
in QUESTION 10.1.

Write down the NAMES or FORMULAE of the TWO products formed in this
step. (2)

10.3 Write down a balanced equation for the preparation of ammonium nitrate. (3)

10.4 Calculate the mass, in kilogram, of ammonium nitrate that can be made from
6,8 x 104 kg of ammonia and excess nitric acid.
(One mole of ammonia produces one mole of ammonium nitrate.) (3)

10.5 Ammonium nitrate is often mixed with potassium chloride and ammonium
phosphate. Give a reason why it is mixed with these compounds. (1)
[10]

TOTAL: 150

Copyright reserved
Physical Sciences/P2 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2016
NSC

CENTRE NUMBER:
EXAMINATION NUMBER:

QUESTION 5.3.2

Hand in this GRAPH SHEET with your ANSWER BOOK.

Graph of concentration versus time


2,0

1,5
Concentration (mol∙dm-3)

1,0

0,5

0
0 50 100 150 200 250
Time (minutes)

Copyright reserved
NATIONAL
SENIOR CERTIFICATE

GRADE 12

PHYSICAL SCIENCES: CHEMISTRY (P2)

FEBRUARY/MARCH 2017

MARKS: 150

TIME: 3 hours

This question paper consists of 16 pages and 4 data sheets.

Copy right reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 3 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2017
NSC

QUESTION 1: MULTIPLE-CHOICE QUESTIONS

Various options are provided as possible answers to the following questions. Write
down the question number (1.1–1.10), choose the answer and make a cross (X) over
the letter (A–D) of your choice in the ANSWER BOOK.

EXAMPLE:

1.11 A B C D

1.1 Which ONE of the following is the product formed in the Haber process?

A Nitrogen

B Ammonia

C Nitric acid

D Sulphuric acid (2)

1.2 A carbonyl group is the functional group of …

A alcohols.

B ketones.

C haloalkanes.

D carboxylic acids. (2)

1.3 Consider the structure of an organic compound below.

CH3 CH3

C C

CH3 CH3

The IUPAC name of this compound is …

A 2,3-dimethylbut-2-ene.

B 2,2-dimethylbut-2-ene.

C 1,1,2-trimethylprop-1-ene.

D 1,1,2,2-tetramethylethene. (2)

Copy right reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 4 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2017
NSC

1.4 Consider the reaction represented below.

CH3CH2CH2CH2CH3 CH3CHCH2 + X

Which ONE of the following CORRECTLY gives the type of reaction that
takes place and the IUPAC name of product X?

Type of reaction Product X


A Elimination Ethane
B Elimination Ethene
C Addition Ethane
D Addition Ethene (2)

1.5 Consider the following balanced equation of a chemical reaction:

2NaCℓ + 2H2O → Cℓ2 + H2 + 2NaOH

Which ONE of the following statements about the reaction is correct?

The reaction takes place in a/an …

A galvanic cell and absorbs energy.

B galvanic cell and releases energy.

C electrolytic cell and absorbs energy.

D electrolytic cell and releases energy. (2)

1.6 The following equation represents the reaction taking place in an


electrochemical cell:

Ni(s) + Pb2+(aq) → Ni2+(aq) + Pb(s)

The flow of electrons through the external circuit of this cell is from …

A Pb at the anode to Ni at the cathode.

B Pb at the cathode to Ni at the anode.

C Ni at the cathode to Pb at the anode.

D Ni at the anode to Pb at the cathode. (2)

Copy right reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 5 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2017
NSC

1.7 A solution has a pH = 1. This solution …

A contains no OH─ ions.

B neutralises a hydrochloric acid solution of pH = 1.

C contains a higher concentration of H3O+ ions than OH─ ions.

D contains a higher concentration of OH─ ions than H3O+ ions. (2)

1.8 A potential energy diagram can be used to show the activation energy (E A )
and the heat of reaction (ΔH) of a reaction.

Which ONE of the following combinations of values of EA and ΔH CANNOT


be obtained for any reaction?

EA (kJ·mol-1) ∆H (kJ·mol-1)
A 50 -100
B 50 +100
C 100 +50
D 100 -50 (2)

1.9 Initially, 2 mol CO(g) and 2 mol H2(g) are sealed in a container. The reaction
reaches equilibrium according to the following balanced equation:

CO(g) + 2H2(g) ⇌ CH3OH(g)

At equilibrium the amount of CH3OH(g) in the mixture will be …

A 1 mol.

B 2 mol.

C less than 1 mol.

D greater than 1 mol. (2)

Copy right reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 6 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2017
NSC

1.10 The graph below represents the change in concentration of a reactant against
time for a chemical reaction.

Concentration

Time

In which ONE of the following graphs does the dotted line show the effect of a
catalyst on this reactant?

A B
Concentration

Concentration

Time Time
C D
Concentration
Concentration

Time Time (2)


[20]

Copy right reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 7 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2017
NSC

QUESTION 2 (Start on a new page.)

The letters A to F in the table below represent six organic compounds.

H CH3 CH3

A CH3CH2CH2CHO B H C C C CH2

H CH3

C C4H8O D C3H8O

H H H H
O
E H C C C C H
F CH3CH2CH2 C O CH2CH2CH3
H O H H

2.1 Write down the letter that represents EACH of the following:

2.1.1 A hydrocarbon (1)

2.1.2 An alcohol (1)

2.1.3 An ester (1)

2.2 Write down the IUPAC name of:

2.2.1 Compound A (1)

2.2.2 Compound B (3)

2.3 Compound C is a functional isomer of compound A. Write down the structural


formula of compound C. (2)

2.4 Compound D is used as one of the reactants to prepare compound F.


Write down the:

2.4.1 Type of reaction which takes place to prepare compound F (1)

2.4.2 IUPAC name of compound D (2)

2.4.3 Structural formula of the other organic reactant used (2)

2.4.4 IUPAC name of compound F (2)


[16]

Copy right reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 8 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2017
NSC

QUESTION 3 (Start on a new page.)

Learners investigate factors which influence the boiling points of alcohols.

They use equal volumes of each of the alcohols and heat them separately in a water
bath. The temperature at which each boils is measured. The results obtained are
shown in the table below.

BOILING POINTS OF ALCOHOLS


ALCOHOLS
(°C)
Butan-1-ol 117,7
Pentan-1-ol 138,5
Hexan-1-ol 157,0

3.1 Define the term boiling point. (2)

3.2 What property of alcohols requires them to be heated in a water bath? (1)

3.3 The boiling points of the alcohols are compared with each other.

3.3.1 What structural requirements must the alcohols meet to make it a


fair comparison? (2)

3.3.2 Fully explain the trend in the boiling points. (3)

3.4 How will the boiling point of hexan-1-ol be affected if the volume of hexan-1-ol
used is doubled? Choose from INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS
THE SAME. (1)

3.5 In another investigation the learners compare the boiling points of hexan-1-ol
and hexanal.

3.5.1 Write down the independent variable for this comparison. (1)

3.5.2 They find that the boiling point of hexan-1-ol is higher than that of
hexanal.

Fully explain this observation. (4)


[14]

Copy right reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 9 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2017
NSC

QUESTION 4 (Start on a new page.)

4.1 Consider the reactions represented in the flow diagram below.

Br

CH3 C CH3

CH3
reaction 2
reaction 1

concentrated Compound B reaction 3


Alcohol A C4H8Br2
H2SO4 (An alkene)

Write down the:

4.1.1 Type of reaction represented by reaction 1 (1)

4.1.2 NAME or FORMULA of the inorganic reactant needed for


reaction 1 (1)

4.1.3 Type of alcohol (PRIMARY, SECONDARY or TERTIARY) of which


alcohol A is an example (1)

4.1.4 Type of reaction represented by reaction 2 (1)

4.1.5 IUPAC name of compound B (2)

4.1.6 Type of addition reaction represented by reaction 3 (1)

4.1.7 Balanced equation for reaction 3 using structural formulae (4)

Copy right reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 10 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2017
NSC

4.2 A wide range of synthetic polymers are produced by combining large


numbers of similar small organic molecules bonded to each other in a
repeating pattern.

Polymer C below is an example of such a polymer.

H H

C C

H H n
Polymer C
Write down:

4.2.1 ONE word for the underlined phrase (1)

4.2.2 The homologous series to which the 'small organic molecules' used
to produce polymer C belong (1)

4.2.3 The type of polymerisation which takes place to produce polymer C (1)
[14]

QUESTION 5 (Start on a new page.)

The reaction of copper(II) carbonate with excess dilute hydrochloric acid is used to
investigate the rate of reaction. The balanced equation for the reaction is:

CuCO3(s) + 2HCℓ(aq) → CuCℓ2(aq) + H2O(ℓ) + CO2(g)

The apparatus used is illustrated below.

Conical flask

Dilute
hydrochloric acid Copper(II) carbonate lumps
170,00 g Scale

5.1 State TWO ways in which the rate of the reaction above can be increased. (2)

Copy right reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 11 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2017
NSC

During the investigation, samples of both PURE and IMPURE copper(II) carbonate of
EQUAL mass are used. The graphs below are obtained from the results.

170,00

169,95 ----- Impure CuCO3


Mass of flask and contents (g)

––– Pure CuCO3

169,90

169,85

169,80

169,75

169,70
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Time (s)

5.2 Write down the reaction time for the reaction of the pure CuCO3 with HCℓ. (1)

5.3 Assume that all the gas formed during the two reactions escape from
the flask and that the impurities do not react.

Calculate the:

5.3.1 Average rate of the reaction of the pure sample over the first 20 s (3)

5.3.2 Percentage purity of the impure sample (4)

5.3.3 Maximum volume of CO2(g) produced during the reaction of the


pure sample of CuCO3 if the reaction takes place at STANDARD
CONDITIONS (3)

5.4 Sketch a graph of the volume of gas produced versus time for the reaction of
the pure CuCO3. Indicate the reaction time on the x-axis. (2)
[15]

Copy right reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 12 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2017
NSC

QUESTION 6 (Start on a new page.)

Hydrogen and iodine are sealed in a 2 dm3 container. The reaction is allowed to reach
equilibrium at 700 K according to the following balanced equation:

H2(g) + I2(g) ⇌ 2HI(g)

6.1 Give a reason why changes in pressure will have no effect on the equilibrium
position. (1)

6.2 At equilibrium, 0,028 mol H2(g) and 0,017 mol I2(g) are present in the
container.

Calculate the initial mass of I2(g), in grams, that was sealed in the container, if
Kc for the reaction is 55,3 at 700 K. (9)

The reaction rate versus time graph below represents different changes made to the
equilibrium mixture.

Forward reaction
Reaction rate

Reverse reaction

0 2 4 6 8 10
Time (minutes)

6.3 What do the parallel lines in the first two minutes indicate? (1)

6.4 State TWO possible changes that could be made to the reaction conditions at
t = 2 minutes. (2)

6.5 The temperature of the equilibrium mixture was changed at t = 4 minutes.

6.5.1 Is the forward reaction EXOTHERMIC or ENDOTHERMIC?

Fully explain the answer. (3)

6.5.2 How will this change influence the Kc value? Choose from
INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME. (1)

6.6 What change was made to the equilibrium mixture at t = 8 minutes? (1)
[18]

Copy right reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 13 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2017
NSC

QUESTION 7 (Start on a new page.)

The Ka values for two weak acids, oxalic acid and carbonic acid, are as follows:

NAME FORMULA Ka
Oxalic acid (COOH)2 5,6 x 10-2
Carbonic acid H2CO3 4,3 x 10-7

7.1 Define the term weak acid. (2)

7.2 Which acid, OXALIC ACID or CARBONIC ACID, is stronger? Give a reason
for the answer. (2)

7.3 Oxalic acid ionises in water according to the following balanced equation:

(COOH)2(s) + 2H2O(ℓ) ⇌ (COO) 22− (aq) + 2H3O+(aq)

Write down the FORMULAE of the TWO bases in this equation. (2)

7.4 Learners prepare 2 dm3 of a sodium hydroxide solution of concentration


0,1 mol∙dm-3.

Calculate the pH of the solution. (4)

7.5 During a titration of the sodium hydroxide solution in QUESTION 7.4 with
dilute oxalic acid, the learners find that 25,1 cm3 of the NaOH(aq) neutralises
exactly 14,2 cm3 of the (COOH)2(aq).

The balanced equation for the reaction is as follows:

2NaOH(aq) + (COOH)2(aq) → (COO)2Na2(aq) + 2H2O(ℓ)

7.5.1 Calculate the concentration of the oxalic acid solution. (5)

The following indicators are available for the titration:

INDICATOR pH RANGE
A 3,1–4,4
B 6,0–7,6
C 8,3–10,0

7.5.2 Which ONE of the indicators above is most suitable for this
titration? Give a reason for the answer. (2)
[17]

Copy right reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 14 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2017
NSC

QUESTION 8 (Start on a new page.)

In the electrochemical cell shown below an aluminium electrode and another metal
electrode, Y, are used.

Q
Aℓ Electrode Y

Aℓ3+(aq) Y2+(aq)

8.1 Write down the:

8.1.1 Name of component Q (1)

8.1.2 Type of electrochemical cell represented above (1)

It is found that the mass of the aluminium electrode increases whilst the cell is
functioning.

8.2 How will EACH of the following change while the cell is functioning?
Choose from INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME.

8.2.1 The concentration of Aℓ3+(aq) (1)

8.2.2 The concentration of Y2+(aq) (1)

8.3 Write down the:

8.3.1 Half-reaction that takes place at electrode Y (2)

8.3.2 Cell notation of the cell (3)

8.4 The initial emf of this cell measured under standard conditions is 0,7 V.

Identify metal Y by means of a calculation. (5)


[14]

Copy right reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 15 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2017
NSC

QUESTION 9 (Start on a new page.)

The simplified diagram below shows an electrolytic cell used in the industrial extraction
of aluminium (Aℓ) from aluminium oxide at temperatures as high as 1 000 °C.
Electrode X is a carbon rod.

Electrode X

Carbon-lined iron
Molten Aℓ2O3 dissolved
in cryolite
Molten Aℓ

The cell reaction that takes place is as follows:

2Aℓ2O3(ℓ) → 4Aℓ(ℓ) + 3O2(g)

9.1 Write down the name of the ore used as source of aluminium oxide. (1)

9.2 Which half-reaction (OXIDATION or REDUCTION) takes place at


electrode X? (1)

9.3 What is the function of the cryolite? (1)

9.4 Write down the reduction half-reaction. (2)

9.5 Write down a balanced equation that shows why the carbon rod, X, must be
replaced regularly. (3)
[8]

Copy right reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 16 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2017
NSC

QUESTION 10 (Start on a new page.)

10.1 The reactions represented below take place during one of the industrial
processes used in the fertiliser industry.

Pt
I: 4NH3(g) + 5O2(g) ⇌ 4NO(g) + 6H2O(g) ∆H < 0

II: NO(g) + O2(g) ⇌ X

III: NO2 + H2O(ℓ) ⇌ HNO3(aq) + _____

Write down:

10.1.1 The name of this industrial process (1)

10.1.2 The function of Pt in reaction I (1)

10.1.3 The NAME of product X (1)

10.1.4 A balanced equation for reaction III (2)

10.1.5 TWO ways in which the yield of the NO(g) obtained in reaction I
can be increased without changing the amount of reactants and
products (2)

10.2 NPK fertilisers contain NH4NO3, (NH4)3PO4 and KCℓ in varying proportions.

10.2.1 What does NPK mean? (1)

10.2.2 Consider the fertiliser illustrated below.

3 – 2 – 3 (25)

50 kg

Calculate the mass, in kg, of KCℓ needed to produce this fertiliser. (6)
[14]

TOTAL: 150

Copyright reserved
NATIONAL
SENIOR CERTIFICATE

GRADE 12

PHYSICAL SCIENCES: CHEMISTRY (P2)

FEBRUARY/MARCH 2018

MARKS: 150

TIME: 3 hours

This question paper consists of 16 pages, 4 data sheets and 1 graph sheet.

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 3 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2018
NSC

QUESTION 1: MULTIPLE-CHOICE QUESTIONS

Various options are provided as possible answers to the following questions. Choose
the answer and write only the letter (A–D) next to the question number (1.1–1.10) in
the ANSWER BOOK, for example 1.11 D.

1.1 Which ONE of the following is the general formula of alkynes?

A CnH2n

B C2nH2n

C CnH2n - 2

D CnH2n + 2 (2)

1.2 The type of reaction that takes place when a carboxylic acid and an alcohol
react in the presence of an acid:

A Addition

B Hydrolysis

C Substitution

D Esterification (2)

1.3 Which ONE of the following isomers has the LOWEST boiling point?

A CH3CH2CH2CH2CH2CH3

B CH3CH2C(CH3)2CH3

C CH3CH(CH3)CH2CH2CH3

D CH3CH2CH(CH3)CH2CH3 (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 4 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2018
NSC

1.4 Which ONE of the reaction rate versus time graphs below best represents the
reaction between magnesium and EXCESS dilute hydrochloric acid?

A Reaction rate B

Reaction rate
Time Time
C D
Reaction rate

Reaction rate
Time Time
(2)

1.5 Which ONE of the following will NOT affect the equilibrium position of
reversible chemical reactions?

A Temperature

B Catalyst

C Pressure

D Concentration (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 5 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2018
NSC

1.6 The following equilibrium exists in pure water at 25 °C.

2H2O(ℓ) ⇌ H3O+(aq) + OH  (aq) ∆H > 0

At this temperature, the pH = 7 and Kw = 1 x 10-14.

The temperature of the water is now increased to 90 °C.

Which ONE of the following is TRUE at the new temperature?

A pH = 7

B [H3O+] = [ OH  ]

C [H3O+][ OH  ] = 10-14

D [H3O+] = 10-7 mol∙dm-3 (2)

1.7 A hydrochloric acid solution is titrated against an ammonia solution.


The balanced equation for the reaction is:
HCℓ(aq) + NH4OH(aq) → NH4Cℓ(aq) + H2O(ℓ)
Which ONE of the following gives the pH of the solution at the end point and
the reason for this pH?

pH REASON
+
A 3 H3O (aq) is formed during the ionisation of HCℓ(aq).
B 5 H3O+(aq) is formed during hydrolysis of NH4 (aq).
C 7 Neutralisation takes place at the end point.
D 9 OH-(aq) is formed during hydrolysis of NH4 (aq). (2)

1.8 A decrease in the oxidation number of an atom during a chemical reaction is


known as …

A redox.

B oxidation.

C reduction.

D electrolysis. (2)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 6 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2018
NSC

1.9 The two half-reactions below are used to construct a galvanic cell.

X+(aq) + e- ⇌ X(s) Ereduction



= + 0,15 V

Y2+(aq) + 2e- ⇌ Y(s) Ereduction



= - 0,15 V

Which ONE of the statements below is CORRECT when the cell is in


operation?

A X+(aq) is reduced.

B Y(s) is reduced.

C X(s) | X+(aq) is the negative electrode.

D Electrons flow from X(s) to Y(s) in the external circuit. (2)

1.10 Which ONE of the following is CORRECT for the industrial preparation of
sulphuric acid?

PROCESS CATALYST
A Ostwald Platinum
B Haber Iron
C Contact Iron
D Contact Vanadium pentoxide (2)
[20]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 7 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2018
NSC

QUESTION 2 (Start on a new page.)


The letters A to E in the table below represent six organic compounds.

H O H H H H H O

A H C C C C H B H C C C C H

H H H H H H
H C H

C Butan-1-ol D Butan-2-one

CH3

H CH3 CH2 H H H H

E H C C C C C C C H

H CH2 H H OH H H

CH3

2.1 Write down the LETTER that represents EACH of the following:
2.1.1 A tertiary alcohol (1)
2.1.2 An aldehyde (1)
2.1.3 A ketone (1)
2.1.4 A functional isomer of compound B (1)
2.2 Write down the IUPAC name of:
2.2.1 Compound B (1)
2.2.2 Compound E (4)
2.3 Define positional isomers. (2)
2.4 Write down the STRUCTURAL FORMULA of:
2.4.1 A positional isomer of compound C (2)
2.4.2 Compound D (2)
2.4.3 The organic acid that will react with compound C to form
butyl propanoate (2)
[17]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 8 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2018
NSC

QUESTION 3 (Start on a new page.)

Study the vapour pressure versus temperature graphs for three organic
compounds, X, Y and Z, below which belong to different homologous series.

Atmospheric pressure is 100 kPa.

Graphs of vapour pressure versus temperature

200
X
Vapour pressure (kPa)

Y
150
Z

100

50

0 25 50 75 100 125
Temperature (°C)

3.1 Write down the vapour pressure of compound Y at 90 °C. (1)

3.2 The graphs can be used to determine the boiling points of the three
compounds.

3.2.1 Define boiling point. (2)

3.2.2 Determine the boiling point of compound X. (1)

3.3 The homologous series to which the three compounds of similar molecular
masses belong, were identified in random order as:

alcohol; carboxylic acid; ketone

3.3.1 Which compound (X, Y or Z) is the carboxylic acid? (1)

3.3.2 Explain the answer to QUESTION 3.3.1 by referring to the type of


intermolecular forces in compounds of each of the homologous
series above. (4)

3.3.3 Compound X has three carbon atoms per molecule. Write down
the IUPAC name of compound X. (1)
[10]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 9 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2018
NSC

QUESTION 4 (Start on a new page.)

Consider the incomplete equations for reactions I to IV below. P, Q, R and S are


organic compounds.

I Q + Br2 2-bromobutane + HBr

II nP CH2 CH2
n

heat
III
R 2P + Q

heat
IV 2-bromobutane + KOH (in ethanol) S + T + H2O

4.1 Define a cracking reaction. (2)

4.2 Write down the reaction number (I, II, III or IV) that represents EACH of the
following:

4.2.1 A cracking reaction (1)

4.2.2 An addition reaction (1)

4.2.3 A substitution reaction (1)

4.3 Write down:

4.3.1 ONE reaction condition for reaction I (1)

4.3.2 The compound (P, Q, R or S) that represents an unsaturated


hydrocarbon (1)

4.3.3 The IUPAC name of compound P (1)

4.3.4 The molecular formula of compound R (2)

4.3.5 The structural formula of compound Q (2)

4.3.6 The structural formula of compound S (2)


[14]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 10 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2018
NSC

QUESTION 5 (Start on a new page.)

ANSWER QUESTION 5.3 ON THE ATTACHED GRAPH PAPER.

Learners use the reaction between sodium thiosulphate and hydrochloric acid to
investigate one of the factors that affects reaction rate. The balanced equation for the
reaction is:

Na2S2O3(aq) + 2HCℓ(aq) → 2NaCℓ(aq) + H2O(ℓ) + SO2(g) + S(s)

The diagram below shows the experimental setup.

flask

Na2S2O3(aq) and HCℓ(aq)


white paper

In the first experiment, 50 cm3 of the sodium thiosulphate solution is added to


100 cm3 of a 2 mol∙dm-3 dilute hydrochloric acid solution in a flask that is placed over a
cross drawn on a sheet of white paper. The hydrochloric acid is in EXCESS.

The time taken for the cross to become invisible, when viewed from the top, is
recorded.

The experiment is then repeated four times with different volumes of the sodium
thiosulphate solution. The results obtained are shown in the table below.

VOLUME AVERAGE RATE


OF VOLUME
TIME 1
EXPERIMENT OF ( )
Na2S2O3 (s) ti m e
(cm3) H2O (cm3)
(x 10-2 s-1)
1 50 0 22,7 4,4
2 40 10 28,6 3,5
3 30 20 38,5 2,6
4 20 30 58,8 1,7
5 10 40 111,1 0,9

5.1 Define reaction rate. (2)

5.2 How does the concentration of the sodium thiosulphate solution used
in experiment 2 compare to that used in experiment 5? Choose from MORE
THAN, LESS THAN or EQUAL TO. (1)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 11 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2018
NSC

5.3 Draw a graph of average reaction rate versus volume of sodium thiosulphate
used on the attached GRAPH SHEET.
(ATTACH THIS GRAPH SHEET TO YOUR ANSWER BOOK.) (3)

5.4 Use the information in the graph to answer the following questions.

5.4.1 Determine the volume of dilute sodium thiosulphate solution


that needs to react in order for the cross to become invisible
in 40 seconds.

USE DOTTED LINES ON THE GRAPH TO SHOW HOW YOU


ARRIVED AT THE ANSWER. (3)

5.4.2 Write down a conclusion for this investigation. (2)

5.5 Use the collision theory to explain the effect of an increase in concentration
on reaction rate. (3)

5.6 The mass of sulphur produced in experiment 1 is 1,62 g. Calculate the mass
of the sodium thiosulphate used in experiment 1. (4)
[18]

QUESTION 6 (Start on a new page.)

6.1 A reversible gaseous reaction is allowed to reach equilibrium in a closed


container at different temperatures and pressures.

The graph below shows the percentage yield for this reaction at 30 kPa as the
temperature is increased.
Percentage yield

30 kPa

Temperature
Use the information in the graph above to answer the following questions.

6.1.1 State Le Chatelier's principle. (2)

6.1.2 The heat of reaction (∆H) for the forward reaction is POSITIVE. Use
Le Chatelier's principle to explain this statement. (3)

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 12 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2018
NSC

The graph below show the percentage yield for this reaction as pressure
changes at constant temperature.

Percentage yield

Pressure

6.1.3 Explain the effect of an increase in pressure on the equilibrium


position of a reaction. (2)

6.1.4 Which ONE of the following equations (I, II or III) represents the
equilibrium above?

I: 2A(g) + 3B(g) ⇌ 3C(g)


II: A(g) + B(g) ⇌ 3C(g)
III: A(g) + B(g) ⇌ 2C(g) (2)

6.2 A mixture of 0,2 moles of hydrogen chloride (HCℓ) and 0,11 moles
of oxygen gas (O2) is sealed in a 200 cm3 flask at a certain temperature.
The reaction reaches equilibrium according to the balanced equation below:

4HCℓ(g) + O2(g) ⇌ 2Cℓ2(g) + 2H2O(g)

It is found that 1,825 g of hydrogen chloride is present at equilibrium.

Calculate the equilibrium constant, Kc, for this reaction at this temperature. (9)
[18]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 13 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2018
NSC

QUESTION 7 (Start on a new page.)

7.1 The balanced equation below represents the first step in the ionisation of
sulphuric acid (H2SO4) in water:

H2SO4(ℓ) + H2O(ℓ) ⇌ H3O+(aq) + HSO 4 (aq)

7.1.1 Write down the FORMULAE of the TWO bases in the equation
above. (2)

7.1.2 Is sulphuric acid a STRONG or a WEAK acid? Give a reason for


the answer. (2)

7.2 Learners use the reaction of a 0,15 mol∙dm-3 sulphuric acid solution with a
sodium hydroxide solution in two different experiments. The balanced
equation for the reaction is:

H2SO4(aq) + 2NaOH(aq) → Na2SO4(aq) + H2O(ℓ)

7.2.1 They use 24 cm3 of H2SO4(aq) in a titration to neutralise


26 cm3 of NaOH(aq).

Calculate the concentration of the NaOH(aq). (5)

7.2.2 In another experiment, 30 cm3 of the H2SO4(aq) is added


to 20 cm3 of a 0,28 mol∙dm-3 NaOH solution in a beaker.

Calculate the pH of the final solution. (8)


[17]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 14 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2018
NSC

QUESTION 8 (Start on a new page.)

8.1 A group of learners use the redox reaction below to construct an


electrochemical cell.

Sn2+(aq) + 2Ag+(aq) → 2Ag(s) + Sn4+(aq)

8.1.1 Define a reducing agent in terms of electron transfer. (2)

8.1.2 Name a substance that should be used as electrode in the anode


half-cell. (1)

8.1.3 Write down the NAME or FORMULA of the reducing agent. (1)

8.1.4 Write down the cell notation of the cell. (3)

8.1.5 Calculate the initial emf of this cell under standard conditions. (4)

8.2 In a separate experiment, the learners place magnesium ribbon in a beaker


containing a blue solution of copper(II) sulphate. After a while the solution
becomes colourless.

Copper(II) sulphate solution


Magnesium ribbon

8.2.1 State ONE observable change in the beaker, besides a colour


change of the solution, that the learners can make. (1)

8.2.2 Refer to the relative strengths of oxidising agents or reducing


agents to explain why the solution becomes colourless. (3)
[15]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 15 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2018
NSC

QUESTION 9 (Start on a new page.)

The graph below represents the changes in mass that occur at electrode A
and electrode B in an electrolytic cell during the purification of copper.

5,0
4,6
A
Mass (g)

B
0,2
0
Time
9.1 Define electrolysis. (2)

9.2 Which graph, A or B, represents the change in mass of the anode during
electrolysis? (1)

9.3 Write down the equation of the half-reaction which takes place at the cathode
of this cell. (2)

9.4 Use the information in the graph and calculate the percentage purity of the
impure copper. (4)
[9]

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 16 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2018
NSC

QUESTION 10 (Start on a new page.)

10.1 The diagram below shows processes involved in the production of


fertiliser X and fertiliser Z.

Haber process

H2SO4 Process A Product Q


X Product Q HNO3 Z

Write down the:

10.1.1 Balanced equation for the formation of product Q (3)

10.1.2 FORMULA of fertiliser X (1)

10.1.3 NAME of process A (1)

10.1.4 NAME of fertiliser Z (1)

10.2 A 10 kg bag of NPK fertiliser is labelled 6 : 1 : 5 (22).

10.2.1 What is the meaning of NPK? (1)

10.2.2 What is the meaning of (22) on the label? (1)

10.2.3 Calculate the mass of potassium in the bag. (4)


[12]

TOTAL: 150

Copyright reserved
Physical Sciences/P2 1 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2018
NSC

DATA FOR PHYSICAL SCIENCES GRADE 12


PAPER 2 (CHEMISTRY)

GEGEWENS VIR FISIESE WETENSKAPPE GRAAD 12


VRAESTEL 2 (CHEMIE)

TABLE 1: PHYSICAL CONSTANTS/TABEL 1: FISIESE KONSTANTES

NAME/NAAM SYMBOL/SIMBOOL VALUE/WAARDE


Standard pressure
p 1,013 x 105 Pa
Standaarddruk
Molar gas volume at STP
Vm 22,4 dm3∙mol-1
Molêre gasvolume by STD
Standard temperature
Standaardtemperatuur T 273 K
Charge on electron
e -1,6 x 10-19 C
Lading op elektron
Avogadro's constant
NA 6,02 x 1023 mol-1
Avogadro-konstante

TABLE 2: FORMULAE/TABEL 2: FORMULES

m N
n n
M NA
n m V
c or/of c n
V MV Vm
c a v a na
 pH = -log[H3O+]
c b v b nb

Kw = [H3O+][OH-] = 1 x 10-14 at/by 298 K

Eθcell  Eθcathode  Eθanode / Eθsel  Ekatode


θ
 Eθanode

or/of
Eθcell  Ereduction
θ
 Eθoxidation / Eθsel  Ereduksie
θ
 Eθoksidasie

or/of
Eθcell  Eθoxidisingagent  Ereducing
θ
agent / E sel  Eoksideermiddel  Ereduseermiddel
θ θ θ

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 2 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2018
NSC
TABLE 3: THE PERIODIC TABLE OF ELEMENTS
TABEL 3: DIE PERIODIEKE TABEL VAN ELEMENTE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
(I) (II) (III) (IV) (V) (VI) (VII) (VIII)
Atomic number
1 KEY/SLEUTEL Atoomgetal 2
2,1

H He
1 29 4
3 4 Electronegativity Symbol 5 6 7 8 9 10
Cu

1,9
1,0

1,5

2,0

2,5

3,0

3,5

4,0
Li Be Elektronegatiwiteit
63,5
Simbool B C N O F Ne
7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Aℓ Cℓ
0,9

1,2

1,5

1,8

2,1

2,5

3,0
Na Mg Approximate relative atomic mass Si P S Ar
23 24 Benaderde relatiewe atoommassa 27 28 31 32 35,5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
0,8

1,0

1,3

1,5

1,6

1,6

1,5

1,8

1,8

1,8

1,9

1,6

1,6

1,8

2,0

2,4

2,8
K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 63,5 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
0,8

1,0

1,2

1,4

1,8

1,9

2,2

2,2

2,2

1,9

1,7

1,7

1,8

1,9

2,1

2,5
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe
86 88 89 91 92 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
55 56 57 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
Tℓ
0,7

0,9

1,6

1,8

1,8

1,9

2,0

2,5
Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Pb Bi Po At Rn
133 137 139 179 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209
87 88 89
0,7

0,9

Fr Ra Ac 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
226
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
140 141 144 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
232 238

Copyright reserved Please turn over


Physical Sciences/P2 3 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2018
NSC
TABLE 4A: STANDARD REDUCTION POTENTIALS
TABEL 4A: STANDAARD-REDUKSIEPOTENSIALE
Half-reactions/Halfreaksies E θ (V)
F2(g) + 2e ⇌ 2F + 2,87
3+  2+
Co +e ⇌ Co + 1,81
H2O2 + 2H +2e
+
⇌ 2H2O +1,77

+ 8H + 5e
2+

+
MnO 4 Mn + 4H2O + 1,51
 
Cℓ2(g) + 2e ⇌ 2Cℓ + 1,36
2 +  3+
Cr2O 7 + 14H + 6e ⇌ 2Cr + 7H2O + 1,33
+ 
O2(g) + 4H + 4e ⇌ 2H2O + 1,23
+  2+
MnO2 + 4H + 2e ⇌ Mn + 2H2O + 1,23
Pt + 2e
2+
⇌ Pt + 1,20
Br2(ℓ) + 2e ⇌ 2Br + 1,07
 + 
NO 3 + 4H + 3e ⇌ NO(g) + 2H2O + 0,96

Increasing reducing ability/Toenemende reduserende vermoë


2+ 
Hg + 2e ⇌ Hg(ℓ) + 0,85
Ag + e
+

Increasing oxidising ability/Toenemende oksiderende vermoë

Ag + 0,80
 + 
NO 3 + 2H + e ⇌ NO2(g) + H2O + 0,80
+ e
3+ 2+
Fe ⇌ Fe + 0,77
O2(g) + 2H + 2e
+
⇌ H2O2 + 0,68
 
I2 + 2e ⇌ 2I + 0,54
+ 
Cu + e ⇌ Cu + 0,52
SO2 + 4H + 4e
+ + 0,45
⇌ S + 2H2O
2H2O + O2 + 4e ⇌ 4OH + 0,40
2+ 
Cu + 2e ⇌ Cu + 0,34
2 

+
SO 4 + 4H + 2e SO2(g) + 2H2O + 0,17
2+  +
Cu +e ⇌ Cu + 0,16
4+  2+
Sn + 2e ⇌ Sn + 0,15
S + 2H + 2e
+
⇌ H2S(g) + 0,14
+ 
2H + 2e ⇌ H2(g) 0,00
+ 3e  0,06
3+
Fe ⇌ Fe
+ 2e  0,13
2+
Pb ⇌ Pb
+ 2e  0,14
2+
Sn ⇌ Sn
+ 2e  0,27
2+
Ni ⇌ Ni

 0,28
2+
Co + 2e ⇌ Co
+ 2e  0,40
2+
Cd ⇌ Cd
 2+
 0,41
3+
Cr +e ⇌ Cr
+ 2e  0,44
2+
Fe ⇌ Fe

 0,74
3+
Cr + 3e ⇌ Cr
+ 2e  0,76
2+
Zn ⇌ Zn
 
2H2O + 2e ⇌ H2(g) + 2OH  0,83
+ 2e  0,91
2+
Cr ⇌ Cr

 1,18
2+
Mn + 2e ⇌ Mn
+ 3e  1,66
3+
Aℓ ⇌ Aℓ

 2,36
2+
Mg + 2e ⇌ Mg
Na + e  2,71
+
⇌ Na
+ 2e  2,87
2+
Ca ⇌ Ca

 2,89
2+
Sr + 2e ⇌ Sr
+ 2e  2,90
2+
Ba ⇌ Ba
+ -
Cs + e ⇌ Cs - 2,92
K + e  2,93
+
⇌ K
Li + e  3,05
+
⇌ Li
Copyright reserved Please turn over
Physical Sciences/P2 4 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2018
NSC
TABLE 4B: STANDARD REDUCTION POTENTIALS
TABEL 4B: STANDAARD-REDUKSIEPOTENSIALE
Half-reactions/Halfreaksies E θ (V)
Li + e  3,05
+
⇌ Li
K + e  2,93
+
⇌ K

 2,92
+
Cs + e ⇌ Cs
+ 2e  2,90
2+
Ba ⇌ Ba

 2,89
2+
Sr + 2e ⇌ Sr
+ 2e  2,87
2+
Ca ⇌ Ca
Na + e  2,71
+
⇌ Na

 2,36
2+
Mg + 2e ⇌ Mg
+ 3e  1,66
3+
Aℓ ⇌ Aℓ

 1,18
2+
Mn + 2e ⇌ Mn
+ 2e  0,91
2+
Cr ⇌ Cr
Increasing oxidising ability/Toenemende oksiderende vermoë

 
2H2O + 2e ⇌ H2(g) + 2OH  0,83
+ 2e  0,76
2+

Increasing reducing ability/Toenemende reduserende vermoë


Zn Zn

 0,74
3+
Cr + 3e ⇌ Cr
+ 2e  0,44
2+
Fe ⇌ Fe
 2+
 0,41
3+
Cr +e ⇌ Cr
+ 2e  0,40
2+
Cd ⇌ Cd

 0,28
2+
Co + 2e ⇌ Co
+ 2e  0,27
2+
Ni ⇌ Ni
+ 2e  0,14
2+
Sn ⇌ Sn

 0,13
2+
Pb + 2e ⇌ Pb
+ 3e  0,06
3+
Fe ⇌ Fe
+ 
2H + 2e ⇌ H2(g) 0,00
S + 2H + 2e
+
⇌ H2S(g) + 0,14
4+  2+
Sn + 2e ⇌ Sn + 0,15
+ e
2+ +
Cu ⇌ Cu + 0,16
2 + 
SO 4 + 4H + 2e ⇌ SO2(g) + 2H2O + 0,17
2+ 
Cu + 2e ⇌ Cu + 0,34
 
2H2O + O2 + 4e ⇌ 4OH + 0,40
SO2 + 4H + 4e
+
⇌ S + 2H2O + 0,45
+ 
Cu + e ⇌ Cu + 0,52
 
I2 + 2e ⇌ 2I + 0,54
O2(g) + 2H + 2e
+
⇌ H2O2 + 0,68
3+  2+
Fe +e ⇌ Fe + 0,77
 + 
NO 3 + 2H + e ⇌ NO2(g) + H2O + 0,80
+ 
Ag + e ⇌ Ag + 0,80
2+ 
Hg + 2e ⇌ Hg(ℓ) + 0,85

+ 4H + 3e
+
NO 3 ⇌ NO(g) + 2H2O + 0,96
 
Br2(ℓ) + 2e ⇌ 2Br + 1,07
+ 2 e
2+
Pt ⇌ Pt + 1,20
+  2+
MnO2 + 4H + 2e ⇌ Mn + 2H2O + 1,23
O2(g) + 4H + 4e
+
⇌ 2H2O + 1,23
2  3+

+
Cr2O 7 + 14H + 6e 2Cr + 7H2O + 1,33
 
Cℓ2(g) + 2e ⇌ 2Cℓ + 1,36
 +  2+
MnO 4 + 8H + 5e ⇌ Mn + 4H2O + 1,51
+ 
H2O2 + 2H +2 e ⇌ 2H2O +1,77
3+  2+
Co +e ⇌ Co + 1,81
F2(g) + 2e ⇌ 2F + 2,87
Copyright reserved
Physical Sciences/P2 DBE/Feb.–Mar. 2018
NSC

CENTRE NUMBER:
EXAMINATION NUMBER:

QUESTION 5.3

Hand in this GRAPH SHEET with your ANSWER BOOK.

Graph of reaction rate versus volume

4,5

4
Average reaction rate (x 10-2 s-1)

3,5

2,5

1,5

0,5

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60

Volume of Na2S2O3(aq) (cm3)

Copyright reserved

You might also like